QUICK INSTALLATION GUIDE

Transcription

1 QUICK INSTALLATION GUIDE <G > Please read the Safety Information in the Printer Reference before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIP- MENT PROBLEMS. UNPACKING THE PRINTER AND CHECKING THE CONTENTS OF THE BOX Caution To prevent injury, this printer should be lifted by at least two people. Check the contents of the box according to the following list. If one or some items are missing, please contact your sales or service representative. Important The parallel cable is not included in the box. It is your responsibility to provide the parallel cable appropriate for the computer you are using. Quick Installation Guide (this sheet) Setup Guide CD-ROM Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Fuser Cleaner Photoconductor Unit Fuser Oil Bottle Power Cord Additional Documentation Remove the plastic bag. Lift the printer and move it to the place where you want to install it. When lifting the printer, use the inset grips on both sides of the printer. ZDHP125E Remove adhesive tape [A] and packing material [B] from the printer. A B A ZDHH015E WHERE TO PUT THE PRINTER The printer s location should be carefully chosen because environmental conditions greatly affect its performance. Warning Confirm that the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible, so that in event of an emergency, it can be unplugged easily. Only connect the machine to the power source described on this sheet. Avoid multi-wiring. Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire. Caution Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. A fire or an electric shock might occur. Place the machine on a strong and level surface. Otherwise, the machine might fall and cause personal injury. If you use the machine in a confined space, confirm that there is a continuous flow of air. Optimum Environmental Conditions Recommended temperature and humidity RH RH Possible operation range Recommended range The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2 both front to rear and left to right. To avoid possible build-up of ozone, locate this printer in a large well ventilated room that has an air turnover more than 30 m 3 /hr/person. If you use this printer in a cold area, leave the printer on or severe cold might damage sensitive components inside the printer. Environments to Avoid Important Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light Dusty areas Areas with corrosive gases Areas excessively cold, hot, or humid Locations near an air conditioner or humidifier Locations near other electronic equipment Locations where the printer might be subjected to frequent strong vibration Power Connection Connect the power cord to a power source with the following specifications: V, 50/60 Hz, 6 A or more Space Required for Installing the Printer Leave enough space around the printer. This space is necessary to operate the printer. The recommended (or minimum) space requirement is as follows: D A C A: more than 50 cm (19.7") B: more than 20 cm (7.9") C: more than 50 cm (19.7") D: more than 70 cm (27.6") ZDHH800E Attaching the Sticker A sticker, mentionning that paper meant for an ink-jet printer is not allowed for use with this printer, is supplied. Please attach the sticker to the bottom right corner of the top of the printer [A] so that the sticker is easy to see. A B ZDHH810E INSTALLING THE FUSER OIL BOTTLE AND FUSER CLEANER Caution Do not incinerate the oil bottle. This action could cause a fire or a personal injury. Spilt oil is very slippery. If oil is spilt, wipe it up with an alkaline cleaner. Otherwise, the oily surfaces can create the danger of slipping and personal injury. Important Prior to moving or transporting the printer, wipe out the fuser oil completely as explained in the Printer Reference included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Open the top cover by pulling the top cover open lever. ZDHH105E Insert the oil bottle. When inserting, the side with the label should be facing toward you, and the mouth of the bottle facing down. ZDHH175E Install the fuser cleaner. When installing, the roller should be facing toward you. ZDHH235E Turn the lock levers to hold the oil bottle and fuser cleaner. Turn the right lock lever clockwise, and the left one counterclockwise. ZDHH245E INSTALLING THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT Important Do not touch the surface of the photoconductor unit. This could damage the photoconductor unit and reduce the print quality. Do not expose the photoconductor unit to a light source greater than 800 luxes for more than two minutes. This could damage the photoconductor unit and reduce the print quality. Lift the green lock levers to a vertical position. ZDHH125E Remove the pins on both sides of the photoconductor unit. Remove the protective sheet. ZDHH615E ZDHH616E Insert the photoconductor unit so that the protruding axles on both sides are aligned with the tracks inside the green lock levers. Lower it until the gears mesh securely. ZDHH145E Important When inserting the photoconductor unit, be careful not to touch or damage the surface. Return the green lock levers to their original positions. ZDHH155E Important Do not return lock levers with force. If you cannot lock them easily, remove the photoconductor unit from the printer. Then insert it again until the gears mesh securely. After that, try again to return the levers to their original positions. Close the top cover until the center of the cover locks securely. ZDHH810E

2 INSTALLING THE TONER CARTRIDGES Warning Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at an appropriate collection site. If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to your local regulations. Caution Do not open the front cover when the paper tray is pulled out halfway. If you do, it might cause a personal injury. Do not eat or swallow toner. Keep toner (used or unused) and toner cartridges out of reach of children. Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using only those provided by an authorized dealer. Open the front cover by pulling the front cover open lever. ZDHH165E Hold the new toner cartridge (cyan) and shake it well, about 3 to 4 times, as shown in the illustration. ZDHT205E Important If the toner cartridge is not shaken enough, toner might not be evenly distributed in the cartridge. In this case, the print quality might be reduced. Remove the tape and the protective cover as shown in the illustration. ZDHT206E Align the toner cartridge (cyan) to the C mark of the printer as shown in the illustration. Slide the cartridge in along the printer s guide rail. ZDHT025E Important Do not use excessive force in sliding in the cartridge. When inserting the cartridge, the side with the seal should be up. Repeat steps 2-4 for installing the magenta, yellow, and black toner cartridges. When installing, start with the magenta toner cartridge, then yellow, and then black. Close the front cover until the center of the front cover locks securely. INSTALLING THE PAPER TRAY Caution The paper tray does not have a stopper. When pulling it out, be careful not to pull it strongly. If you do, the tray might fall and cause personal injury. The following procedure describes how to load A4 K. For more information about the paper sizes that can be set in the paper tray, see Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer in the Printer Reference included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Pull the paper tray out of the printer. Place it on a flat surface. ZDHY017E If necessary, slide the front and side guides to the paper size you want to use. ZDHY035E Load paper with the print side up, into the paper tray. ZDHY045E Important Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. The front and side guides should be set exactly to the paper size to avoid paper feed problems. Do not load different kinds of paper in the tray. If you set a custom paper size, you should enter the paper size with the printer s operation panel. For more information, see Loading Paper in the Paper Tray in the Printer Reference included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Slide the paper tray completely into the printer. Important Be sure to insert the paper tray completely. Otherwise, misfeeds might occur, or the front cover might touch the paper tray. CONNECTING THE POWER CORD Caution When you pull the plug out of the socket, grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord and causing a fire or an electric shock. It is dangerous to handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this may result in receiving an electric shock. Check that the printer s main power switch (on the rear) is set to the Off position. ZDHH076E Check that the printer s power switch is set to the Off position (not depressed). ZDHH085E Attach the power cord to the socket on the back side of the printer. ZDHH055E Plug the other end securely into the wall outlet. SELECTING THE PANEL DISPLAY LANGUAGE Follow the procedure below to select a language. You can select one of the following languages: English, German, French, Italian, Dutch, Spanish, or Japanese. The default setting is English. If you want to use the English panel display, it is not necessary for you to do the following procedures. Turn on the printer. First set the main power switch to the On position, and then depress the power switch. After the machine warms up, the ready message appears on the panel display. Press the Menu ( ) key. The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu Press the or key to display System Menu. <Menu> System Menu Press the Enter ( ) key. The following message appears on the panel display. <System Menu> 1.Paper Tray Press the or key to display 10. Language. <System Menu> 10.Language Press the Enter ( ) key. Press the or key until the language you want to select appears on the lower line of the panel display. Press the Enter ( ) key. Press the On Line ( ) key. The On Line indicator is lit. Press the On Line ( ) key again. The On Line indicator turns off. Press the Reset ( ) key. The setting becomes effective. PRINTING THE TEST PAGE You can check if the printer works properly by printing a test page such as the configuration page. However, you cannot check the connection between the printer and the computer by printing the test page. Turn on the printer. First set the main power switch to the On position, and then depress the power switch. Press the Menu ( ) key. The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu Press the or key to display List Print, and then press the Enter ( ) key. <Menu> List Print The following message appears on the panel display. <List Print> 1.Config.Page Confirm that 1.Config.Page is on the display, and then press the Enter ( ) key. The following message appears on the panel display. <Config.Page> Press # key Press the Enter ( ) key. In a short time, the test printing will start. Printing... Config.Page Important If you cannot complete the test printing correctly, see if an error message appears on the panel display. For more information about error messages, see Troubleshooting in the Printer Reference. Press the On Line ( ) key. Turn off the printer s power switch. CONNECTING THE PRINTER TO A COMPUTER Connect the printer to a computer using a parallel cable. Important The parallel cable is not provided with the printer. It is your responsibility to provide the parallel cable appropriate for the computer that you are using. The printer s parallel connection is a standard bidirectional interface. It requires a standard 36-pin parallel cable compliant with IEEE1284 and a parallel port on the computer. To avoid electrical interference, use a shielded cable. Do not use a parallel cable more than 2.5 meters (8.2 feet) long. Confirm that the printer s power switch is turned off. If it is on, turn it off. Turn the computer off. Attach the parallel cable to the port of the printer. Secure the cable with the metal fittings as shown in the illustration. Important Rating voltage of the parallel port for the computer; Max. DC 5V. Copyright 2000 G Printed in Japan EE GB ZDHH056E Attach the other end of the parallel cable to the port of the computer. Secure the cable. SETTING UP FOR PRINTING Printing requires installation of a printer driver to the operating system. Reference See Printer Driver for This Printer in the Setup Guide. If you want to install options, see Installing Options in the Setup Guide.

3 Setup Guide Zdgh010j.eps Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.

4 Introduction This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS. s: The name of the applications do not appear in the following pages. Confirm which applications you will be using before reading this manual. Descriptions in this manual PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRA- TOR PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT Application Aficio Manager for Admin Net Vision for Admin Aficio Manager for Client Net Vision for Client Power Source 120 V, 50/60 Hz, 11 A or more Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. Operator Safety: This machine is considered a CDRH class 1 laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The machine contains 5-milliwatt, nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator. Laser Safety: The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required. Important Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine. Caution: Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This machine contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye damage. Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version. Supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other than genuine supplier's parts in your supplier's office product. For good copy quality, supplier recommends that you use genuine supplier's toner.

5 Trademarks RICOH-SCRIPT2 is a registered trademark of Ricoh Company. Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe, PostScript and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. AppleTalk, Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Incorporated. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks. s: Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine. Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer. s: The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: Microsoft Windows 95 operating system Microsoft Windows 98 operating system Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me) Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system Version 4.0 Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system Version 4.0 i

6 Safety Information When using your equipment, the following safety precautions should always be followed. Safety During Operation In this manual, the following important symbols are used: R WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury. R CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property. R WARNING: Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension cord. Confirm that the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible, so that in event of an emergency, it can be unplugged easily. Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the power cable or plug becomes frayed or damaged. To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual. Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if any of the following conditions exist: You spill something into the equipment. You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair. Your equipment's cover has been damaged. Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust is flammable and might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or appropriate collection site. If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to local regulations. ii

7 R CAUTION: Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow, and so on. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment. While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the equipment. When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the cable). Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside the equipment. Do not eat or swallow toner. Keep toner (used or unused) and toner cartridge out of reach of children. For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended supplies at a household waste collection point. Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or an appropriate collection site. Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using only those specified by an authorized dealer. The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts with a label indicating a hot surface. Touching a hot surface could result in a burn injury. (v: means hot surface.) Symbols R means a situation that requires you take care. When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot. If you use this printer in a cold area, leave the printer on. Otherwise, severe cold might damage sensitive components inside the printer. iii

8 Energy Star Program As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency. The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming. When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model. This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode. Low-power mode (Energy Saver mode) This printer automatically lowers its power consumption 60 minutes after the last operation has been completed when the Energy Level is set to level 1. To exit Low-power (Energy Saver) mode, press any key on the operation panel. To change the setting of the Energy Saver mode, see Using the Operation Panel in the Printer Reference included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Specifications Lower-power mode (Energy Saver mode) Power Consumption Default Time 35 W or less 30 minutes -Recycled Paper In accordance with the ENERGY STAR Program, we recommend use of recycled paper which is environment friendly. Please contact your sales representative for recommended paper. iv

9 Manuals for This Printer There are six manuals that separately describe the procedures for the installation of a printer and for the operation and maintenance of the printer and its optional equipment. To enhance safe and efficient operation of the printer, all users should read and follow the instructions contained in the following manuals. Quick Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installing the printer. Setup Guide Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about setting up the printer and its options (this manual). Printer Reference Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about using the printer and its options. The manual is included as a PDF file on the CD- ROM. RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions Describes the menus and features you can set using the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver. The manual is provided as a PDF file which is included on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. Network Interface Board Operating Instructions Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about setting up and using the printer in a network environment. The manual is provided as a PDF file which is included on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. UNIX Supplement Provides information about setting up and using the printer in a UNIX environment. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. v

10 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury. R CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property. * The statements above are notes for your safety. Important If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating. This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation. Limitation This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together, or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used. Reference This symbol indicates a reference. [ ] Keys that appear on the machine's panel display. Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display. { } Keys built into the machine's operation panel. Keys on the computer's keyboard. vi

11 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Getting Started Features of This Printer... 1 Printer Drivers for This Printer... 3 Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM... 4 Guide to the Printer... 5 Exterior-Front View... 5 Exterior-Rear View... 6 Interior... 7 Operation Panel... 8 Turning the Printer On and Off Installing Options Available Options Installing the Memory Unit Installing the Network Interface Board Type Connecting the Printer to the Network Buttons and Indicators on the Network Interface Board Installing the Paper Cassette Type204 (Legal) Installing the PAPER FEED UNIT Type Installing the AD390 (Duplex Unit) Configuring the Printer for the Network Configuring the Printer for the Network with the Operation Panel Installing the Printer Driver and Software Installation Method Installing by Auto Run Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver Windows 95/98/Me - Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver Windows Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver Windows NT Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Windows 95/98/Me - Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Windows Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Windows NT Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0 or Macintosh INDEX vii

12 viii

13 1. Getting Started Features of This Printer This printer is designed especially for office workgroups, both for shared usage within a network environment, and for one-to-one usage by being connected directly to a computer. High quality photo image printing With the dpi equivalent resolution, this printer provides you high quality color printing. This is particularly effective when printing photographic images, such as images produced by a digital camera and scanner as well as when printing text and graphics. Using this printer, photo images are rendered more smoothly and with higher detail. High performance This printer provides the high-speed printing. Color Printing: 6 ppm (A4, 8 1 / 2 " 11", simplex) Monochrome Printing: 24 ppm (A4, 8 1 / 2 " 11", simplex) Duplex printing With the optional paper feed unit and duplex unit installed, this printer provides auto duplex printing. Network connectivity This printer is network ready with the optional Network Interface Board. Network utility PRINTER MANAGER, software consisting of ADMINISTRATOR and CLI- ENT versions, is provided. With this software, multiple print devices can be utilized effectively together on a network. This software offers several convenient functions such as parallel printing and recovery printing. PostScript capabilities Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 provides the printer with PostScript capabilities. You can use the printer in the Windows or Macintosh environments. Easy handling for administration You can set up User Codes for individuals or as a unit of a department. This allows you to keep records of the printing done for each User Code. You can also set up a User ID for each print job. To print a job log or a statistics report shows you color category, result and status of printing per each User Code and User ID. Viewing the contents of a job log or a statistics report through the PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR is available. Maximum 100 User Codes and 64 User IDs can be set. 1

14 Getting Started Major specifications 1 Printing Speed *1 24 ppm *2 Maximum Print Quality Emulation Maximum Paper Size Standard Memory Size Maximum Memory Size with Optional Memory 6 ppm * dpi resolutions IPDL-C, RICOH-SCRIPT2 Paper Tray: Custom size *4, length 356mm, width 216mm Paper feed unit: A4, mm 32 MB 256 MB *1 A4K *2 Monochrome printing *3 Full color printing *4 When the optional Paper Cassette Type204 (Legal) is installed. 2

15 Printer Drivers for This Printer Printer Drivers for This Printer Printing requires installation of a printer driver appropriate to the operating system. The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM that comes with this printer. 1 Printer Language Operating System IPDL-C RICOH-SCRIPT2 Windows 95 *1 Windows 98 *2 Windows Me *3 Windows 2000 *4 Windows NT 4.0 *5 Macintosh *6 *1 Microsoft Windows 95 operating system *2 Microsoft Windows 98 operating system *3 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me) *4 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Microsoft Windows 2000 Server *5 Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system Version 4.0, Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system Version 4.0 in a computer using a x86 processor *6 Macintosh OS with LaserWriter 8 Limitation The printer drivers supplied with this printer do not support operation under a system running Windows NT with a RISC based processor (MIPS R Series, Alpha AXP, Power PC). IPDL-C printer drivers The IPDL-C printer drivers are included on the CD-ROM that comes with this printer. The IPDL-C printer drivers allow the computer to communicate with the printer via a printer language. P.38 Windows 95/98/Me - Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver P.39 Windows Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver P.40 Windows NT Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer drivers and PPD (PostScript printer description) files The RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer drivers and the PPD files are included on the CD-ROM that comes with this printer. The RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer drivers allow the computer to communicate with the printer via a printer language. The PPD files allow the printer driver to enable printer specific functions. P.42 Windows 95/98/Me - Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver P.45 Windows Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver P.48 Windows NT Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver P.52 Macintosh 3

16 Getting Started Software and Utilities Included on the CD- ROM 1 PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR A utility for the system administrator to manage printers on the network. Reference For the name of PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR you use, see the inside of front cover of this manual. For more information about using PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINIS- TRATOR, see PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR Help. PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT A utility for users to manage their own print jobs on the network. Reference For the name of PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT you use, see the inside of front cover of this manual. For more information about using PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT, see PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT Help. Multidirect Print A utility for printing on a "Peer-to-Peer" network. Reference For more information about using Multidirect Print, see the Operating Instructions for the optional Network Interface Board included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. PortNavi A utility that helps you to use network printers effectively. It is useful in environments where two or more network printers are used. Reference For more information about PortNavi, see the Operating Instructions for the optional Network Interface Board included as a PDF file on the CD- ROM. Acrobat Reader A utility that allows you to read PDF (Portable Document Format). Documentation about using the printer is included on the CD-ROM in a PDF format. 4

17 Guide to the Printer Guide to the Printer Exterior-Front View ZDHH010E 1. Operation Panel Contains keys for printer operation and a panel display that shows the printer status. 2. Top Cover Open this cover when replacing consumables or when removing misfed paper. A Paper Stopper A: Raise this paper stopper so that printed pages are aligned better on the output tray. Raising this paper stopper also keeps printed pages from falling from the output tray. 4. Power Switch This switch enables you to turn the printer power on and off while the main power switch on the rear is turned on. 5. Paper Tray Load paper into this tray for printing. 6. Paper Stopper B Raise this stopper to keep printed pages from falling from the output tray. ZDGH030J ZDGH020J 3. Front Cover Open this cover when replacing toner cartridges or the waste toner bottle, or when removing misfed paper. 5

18 Getting Started 1 7. Inset Grips Use these grips to lift the printer. There are four grips, two on the left side and two on the right side of the printer. 8. Front Cover Open Lever Press this lever to open the front cover. 9. Top Cover Open Lever Press this lever to open the top cover. 10. Output Tray Printed pages are stacked here. ZDGH040J Exterior-Rear View ZDHH020E 1. Ventilator Allows air to be discharged, preventing components inside the printer from overheating. Remove this cover when replacing the ozone filter. Do not leave the ventilator obstructed or blocked. Doing so creates the danger of malfunction due to overheating. 2. Rear Cover Open this cover when removing misfed paper. 3. Power Connector Connect the power cord to this connector. 4. Printer Board Remove to install optional memory unit or network interface board. 5. Parallel Interface Connector Plug the parallel cable that connects the printer to the computer into this connector. 6. Main Power Switch First turn on the main power switch, and use the power switch on the front panel to turn the printer on or off. Normally, keep the main power switch turned on. Turn off the main power switch when the printer is not to be used for a long period of time or when moving the printer. 6

19 Guide to the Printer Interior ZDGH060J 1. Fuser Cleaner This cleans unnecessary toner from the fuser roller. 2. Fuser Oil Bottle This bottle holds oil used for fusing toner to the paper. 3. Photoconductor Unit This unit is used to compose the image being printed. 4. Toner Cartridges A K: black toner B Y: yellow toner C M: magenta toner D C: cyan toner 5. Waste Toner Bottle This bottle is a receptacle for waste toner generated during the printing process. Be careful to prevent the green film in the photoconductor unit from becoming dirty or damaged, and do not touch the black belt in the unit. The condition of these components directly affects output quality. 7

20 Getting Started Operation Panel 1 Important Never press any operation panel key while the Data In indicator on the operation panel is lit or blinking Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS011E 1. Panel Display The display shows the current status of the printer and error messages. "Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM 2. On Line indicator Tells you whether the printer is online or offline. Stays on while the printer is online (a state in which the printer can receive data from the computer). Stays off when the printer is offline (a state in which printer cannot receive data). 3. Power indicator Stays on while the printer power is on. Stays off when the power is turned off or while the printer is in the Energy Saver mode. 4. {On Line} key Press this key to switch the printer between online and offline. 5. Error indicator Lights up whenever any printer error occurs. A message describing the cause of the error also appears on the panel display. "Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD- ROM 6. {Menu} key Press this key to make and check the printer settings. 7. {Media} key Use this key to select a tray, change the paper size, and to make other settings for printing. 8. {#Enter} key Press this key to execute menu items selected on the panel display. 8

21 Guide to the Printer 9. {U}{T} keys Use these keys to scroll through the selected items and to adjust values on the panel display when making settings. 10. {Escape} key Press this key to return to the previous menu without changing any data. Turning the Printer On and Off 11. {Reset} key Pressing this key while offline resets the printer to its power on default settings. Pressing this key while online cancels the ongoing print job. 12. Data In indicator Blinks while the printer is receiving data from a computer. Stays on if there is data to be printed. 1 Turning on the printer This printer has two power switches; the main power switch on the rear and the power switch on the front panel. Normally, keep the main power switch turned on and use the power switch on the front panel to turn the printer on and off. Important If the printer will not to be used for a long period of time, first turn off the printer by the power switch on the front panel. Then turn the main power switch off, or disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet. A Confirm that the power cord is securely plugged into the outlet and the printer. B Set the printer's main power switch to the On position. ZDGH070J 9

22 Getting Started C Depress the printer's power switch to turn the printer on. 1 ZDGH080J After the printer is turned on, it takes about four minutes to warm up before being able to print. The following message appears on the operation panel. IPDL-C Warming Up When the printer is turned on, the Power indicator will blink repeatedly. Once it stops blinking and remains on, you will be able to send data from a computer to the printer. When the following message appears on the operation panel, the printer will be able to begin printing. IPDL-C Ready Turning off the printer A Confirm that the Data In and Error indicators are off. The Data In indicator stays on when printing and blinks while receiving data from the computer. Do not turn off the printer while it is printing or receiving data. When the Error indicator lights up, a printer error has occurred. Confirm the message that appears on the operation panel and troubleshoot the problem. "Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM 10

23 Guide to the Printer B Press the printer's power switch so that it is unlocked from the depressed position. 1 The Power indicator turns off. ZDGH080J 11

24 Getting Started 1 12

25 2. Installing Options R CAUTION: Before installing options, the machine should be turned off and unplugged for at least thirty minutes. Components inside the machine become very hot, and can cause a burn injury if touched. Before moving the machine, unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the cord is unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or cords can cause an electrical or fire hazard. When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both sides. The machine could break or cause an injury if dropped. It is recommended that at least two persons are used to lift the printer. Otherwise, the printer might fall and cause personal injury. 13

26 Installing Options Available Options You can increase the functionality of the printer by adding options. The following options can be installed on the printer. 2 Reference For more information about the options, see "Options" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Do not use options other than those specified in this manual ZDHH030E 1. Memory Unit P.15 Installing the Memory Unit Memory Unit Type B (32MB) Memory Unit Type B (64MB) Memory Unit Type B (128MB) 2. Network Interface Board Type306 P.17 Installing the Network Interface Board Type PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 P.21 Installing the PAPER FEED UNIT Type AD390 (duplex unit) P.25 Installing the AD390 (Duplex Unit) 5. Paper Cassette Type204 (Legal) P.20 Installing the Paper Cassette Type204 (Legal) 14

27 Installing the Memory Unit Installing the Memory Unit R CAUTION: Before installing options, the machine should be turned off and unplugged for at least thirty minutes. Components inside the machine become very hot, and can cause a burn injury if touched. Important The memory unit can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity. Before touching it, you should touch some metal to remove static electricity from your body. A Turn off the printer's power switch and remove all cables and cords from the printer. B Remove both screws and remove the printer board from the printer as shown in the illustration. C Open the two levers on the slot (A), insert the memory unit by aligning its notch (a) with the guide on the connector, and push it downward so that the two levers close to lock the memory unit (B). ZDGP170J There are two slots for the memory units. When installing only one memory unit, be sure to insert it into the slot as shown in the above illustration. To remove the memory unit, open the two levers so that the memory unit is released, then pull it up gently. 2 ZDGP010J A coin can be used to remove the screws. 15

28 Installing Options D Insert the printer board into the printer. Fasten both screws. 2 ZDGP020J A coin can be used to fasten the screws. E Connect all cables removed in step A. F Plug the printer's power cord back into the printer and the outlet. Turn on the printer's power switch. G Print a configuration page to confirm that the memory unit is properly installed. Reference "Printing the Configuration Page" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM If the memory unit is not properly installed, follow the above procedure to reinstall it. If you fail again, contact your sales or service representative. Important To make the printer recognize the installed option properly, you must set up the option with the printer driver. 16

29 Installing the Network Interface Board Type306 Installing the Network Interface Board Type306 R CAUTION: Before installing options, the machine should be turned off and unplugged for at least thirty minutes. Components inside the machine become very hot, and can cause a burn injury if touched. Important Use a shielded twisted-pair (STP) network cable. There are two connectors on the printer board. You can install the network interface board in either. Two network interface boards cannot be installed at a time. A Turn off the printer's power switch and remove all cables and cords from the printer. B Remove both screws and remove the printer board from the printer as shown in the illustration. C Remove both screws and the metal plate from the printer board. ZDGP190J D Insert the network interface board into the slot and fasten it with both screws that were removed in step C, as shown in the illustration. 2 ZDGP200J ZDGP010J A coin can be used to remove the screws. 17

30 Installing Options 2 E Insert the printer board into the printer. Fasten both screws. ZDGP040J F Connect all cables removed in step A. G Plug the printer's power cord back into the printer and the outlet. Turn on the printer's power switch. H Print a configuration page to confirm that the network interface board is properly installed. Reference "Printing the Configuration Page" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM If the network interface board is not properly installed, follow the above procedure to reinstall it. If you fail again, contact your sales or service representative. Connecting the Printer to the Network Follow these steps to connect the printer to the network. A Confirm that you have the correct network cable. B Confirm that the printer's power switch is turned off. If it is on, turn it off. C Loop the network cable. The loop should be about 15 cm (6 inch) from the end of the cable on the end closest to the connector. D Attach the ferrite core to the loop. TFWX980E E Attach the network cable to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port of the printer. ZDGP050J F Connect the other end of the cable into the network. 18

31 Installing the Network Interface Board Type306 Buttons and Indicators on the Network Interface Board ZDGX010E 1. Button Hold down this button for more than two seconds to print the network configuration page. Hold down this button for more than five seconds to print system log information. 2. Indicator (orange) Stays on while the network interface board is working. 3. Indicator (green) Stays on while 100BASE-TX is working. Stays off while 10BASE-T is working. 4. Indicator (green) Stays on while the printer is in a network environment. 19

32 Installing Options Installing the Paper Cassette Type204 (Legal) 2 R CAUTION: The paper tray does not have a stopper. When pulling out, be careful not to pull it strongly. If you do, the tray might fall and cause personal injury. A Carefully pull the paper tray (tray 1) out of the printer and place it on a flat surface. ZDGY010J Keep the paper tray with paper in a cool and dark place. B Slide the Paper Cassette Type204 completely into the printer. ZDHP010E 20

33 Installing the PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 Installing the PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 R CAUTION: It is recommended that at least two persons are used to lift the printer. Otherwise, the machine might fall and cause personal injury. When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both sides of the machine. Otherwise, the machine might fall and cause personal injury. To install the optional duplex unit, it is necessary to install the paper feed unit first. A Check the contents of the box for the following items. Paper feed unit (1 pc) Left side cover (1 pc) Right side cover (1 pc) B Remove the adhesive tape. ZDGP070J C Adjust the level adjustors located under the paper feed unit, if necessary. You can raise up the right side of the paper feed unit (and the printer) by adjusting the level adjustors as illustrated. This will keep the printer level, even if the location for the printer is slightly inclined, for example. If adjusting the level adjustors is not necessary, go to step D. 2 ZDHP020E ZDGP080J 21

34 Installing Options D Remove the screw and securing bracket from the paper feed unit. H Set the locking plate on the paper feed unit to the RELEASE position. 2 ZDGP090J E Turn off the printer's power switch and remove all cables and cords from the printer. F Remove the paper cassette from the printer. G Remove the connector cover from the printer. ZDGP110J Important Be sure to set the locking plate to the RELEASE position. If you place the printer on the paper feed unit with the locking plate set to the LOCK position, the printer or the paper feed unit may be damaged. I Lift the printer using the inset grips on both sides of the printer. ZDGP100J Keep the removed connector cover. When you detach the paper feed unit, re-attach the connector cover to the printer. ZDGP120J Important It is recommended that at least two persons are used to lift the printer. 22

35 Installing the PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 J Align the printer onto the 2 upright pins on the paper feed unit and then lower it gently. L Insert the securing bracket removed in step D into the groove under the printer, and secure the bracket using the screw removed in step D. 2 ZDGP130J K Set the locking plate, which was moved to the RELEASE position in steph, to the LOCK position again. ZDGP140J M Connect the paper feed unit cable to the lower socket inside the printer securely. Make sure the protruding part of the cable connector is facing downward. ZDGP510J ZDGP150J 23

36 Installing Options 2 N Attach the right and left side covers. The tray which is selected when the printer is turned on can be changed to the paper feed unit using the Operation Panel. Using the Operation Panel in the Printer Reference included as a PDF file on the CD- ROM Important To make the printer recognize the installed option properly, you must set up the option with the printer driver. ZDGP160J O Install the paper cassette removed in step F to the printer. P Connect all cables removed in step E. Q Plug the printer's power cord back into the printer and the outlet. Turn on the printer's power switch. R Print a configuration page to confirm that the paper feed unit is properly installed. Reference "Printing the Configuration Page" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM If the paper feed unit is properly installed, you can see Tray 2 under the Printer Information of the configuration page. If the paper feed unit does not work, follow the above procedure to reinstall it. If it still does not work, contact your sales or service representative. 24

37 Installing the AD390 (Duplex Unit) Installing the AD390 (Duplex Unit) R CAUTION: Before installing options, the machine should be turned off and unplugged for at least thirty minutes. Components inside the machine become very hot, and can cause a burn injury if touched. To install the duplex unit, you need to install the optional paper feed unit first. Once the duplex unit is installed on the printer, it is necessary to open the upper portion of the duplex unit before you can open the top cover of the printer. A Turn off the printer's power switch and remove all cables and cords from the printer. B Take out the duplex unit cable as shown in the illustration. C Remove the three covers from the printer as shown in the illustration. ZDGP400J D Remove the two covers from the paper feed unit as shown in the illustration. 2 ZDGP270J ZDGP410J 25

38 Installing Options 2 E Remove the left side cover. G Attach the duplex unit to the printer. Insert the two guide pins on the duplex unit to the cutouts on the paper feed unit, and insert the hooks on the duplex unit to the holes on the printer while slightly lifting up the duplex unit. Then push in the duplex unit against the printer. ZDGP420J F Confirm the location of the two guide pins and two hooks on the duplex unit, as well as the corresponding cutouts and holes on the paper feed unit and the printer. ZDGP440J H Open the upper portion of the duplex unit. Gently open the upper portion using the left and right inset grips. ZDGP430J ZDGP450J 26

39 Installing the AD390 (Duplex Unit) I Secure the duplex unit with the two screws, as shown in the illustration. L Connect the duplex unit cable to the upper socket inside the printer securely. Make sure the protruding part of the cable connector is facing downward. 2 ZDGP460J ZDGP480J J Remove the adhesive tape and the packing material. M Attach the left side cover. ZDGP490J ZDGP470J K Close the upper portion of the duplex unit. N Connect all cables removed in step A. O Plug the printer's power cord back into the printer and the outlet. Turn on the printer's power switch. 27

40 Installing Options P Print a configuration page to confirm that the duplex unit is properly installed. 2 Reference "Printing the Configuration Page" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM If the duplex unit is properly installed, you can see :Dx.x at the end of the Firmware Version section of the configuration page. If the duplex unit does not work, follow the above procedure to reinstall it. If it still does not work, contact your sales or service representative. Important To make the printer recognize the installed option properly, you must set up the option with the printer driver. 28

41 3. Configuring the Printer for the Network Configuring the Printer for the Network with the Operation Panel After installing the optional Network Interface Board, configure it for the network using the printer's operation panel. The following table shows the operation panel settings and their defaults. These are included in the System Menu. Setting name A Press {Menu}. B Press {T} to display the following message. <Menu> System Menu Default value 32 IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Add (Gateway Address) 35 Access CTL. (Access Control Address) 36 Access Mask (Access Control Mask) 37 Net Boot (Network Boot) 38 Frame NW (Frame type Net- Ware) 39 Active PTL. (Active Protocol) None Auto Select All Active j l C Press {#Enter}. D Use the following table to select the menu item appropriate for the network. Menu item on the panel display All Active (Default Setting) None TCP/IP Only NetWare Only Active Protocol TCP & NetWare ' ' EtherTalk Only TCP *1 NW *2 ET *3 NB *4 ' ' ' ' TCP& EtherTalk ' ' NetW&EtherTalk ' ' TCP&NW&EtherTK ' ' ' NetBEUI Only ' TCP & NetBEUI ' ' NetW& NetBEUI ' ' TCP & NW & NB ' ' ' Etalk&NetBEUI ' ' TCP& ETK& NB ' ' ' NW & ETK & NB ' ' ' ' means that this protocol is active. A blank cell means that this protocol is not active. *1 TCP/IP *2 NetWare *3 EtherTalk *4 NetBEUI ' ' ' 29

42 Configuring the Printer for the Network 3 You should not select protocols that are not used on the network. When using Pure IP in NetWare 5, select TCP/IP to be active. A Press {T} or {U} until the following message appears. <System Menu> j 39.Active PTL. l B Press {#Enter}. The current setting appears on the panel display. <Active PTL.> j *All Active l C Press {U} or {T} until the protocol you want to use appears. D Press {#Enter}. The actual procedure may differ depending on the protocol you use. Follow the appropriate procedure below. TCP/IP NetWare AppleTalk NetBEUI E V F V G V I V J V K HV I V J V K I V J V K I V J V K E If you use TCP/IP, you should assign the IP Address to the printer. To get an IP address for the printer, contact your network administrator. If you use TCP/IP, you should assign the IP address to the printer. A Press {U} or {T} until the following message appears. <System Menu> j 32.IP Address l B Press {#Enter}. The current IP address appears on the panel display j jl/# C Press {U} or {T} to specify the leftmost digit of the IP address j jl/# D Press {#Enter}. The pointer (U) moves to the next digit as shown j jl/# You can return the pointer (U) to the previous (left) digit by pressing {Escape}. If you press {Escape} when the pointer (U) is on the leftmost position, the specified IP address is reset. E Press {U} or {T} to specify the second digit of the IP address j jl/# F Press {#Enter}. 30

43 Configuring the Printer for the Network with the Operation Panel G Repeat steps E and F to specify the remaining digit of the IP address j Check if the pointer (U) is at the rightmost digit, press {#Enter} to register the IP address you specified. <System Menu> j 32.IP Address l F If you use TCP/IP, you should assign 33.Subnet Mask, 34.Gateway Add, 35.Access CTL. and 36.Access Mask using the same procedure for specifying the IP address. P.32 Address G If you use TCP/IP, you can make settings for Network Boot. You can select how to assign the printer's address using the computer. Select one of the items on the following table. Menu item on the panel display ARP+PING *1 ARP+PING *2 RARP+TFTP *3 BOOTP *4 DHCP Available methods ARP & RARP ' ' AR *1 RA *2 BO *3 DH *4 ARP & BOOTP ' ' ARP&RARP&B OOTP None (Default Setting) RARP+TFTP BOOTP RARP & BOOTP DHCP ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' You should set up the server, if you want to use RARP+TFTP, BOOTP or DHCP. A Press {T} or {U} until the following message appears. <System Menu> j 37.Net Boot l B Press {#Enter}. The current setting appears on the panel display. <Net Boot> *None j l C Press {U} or {T} until the method you want to use appears. D Press {#Enter}. H If you use NetWare, select the NetWare frame type. Select one of the items below if necessary. Auto Select (Default) Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet 2 Ethernet SNAP In most situations, use the default setting ( Auto Select ). When you select Auto Select, the frame type first detected by the printer is adopted. If the network can use more than two frame types, the printer may fail to select the correct frame type if Auto Select is selected. In this case, select the appropriate frame type. 31 3

44 Configuring the Printer for the Network 3 A Press {T} or {U} until the following message appears. <System Menu> j 38.Frame NW l B Press {#Enter}. The current setting appears on the panel display. <Frame NW> *Auto Select j l C Press {U} or {T} until the frame type you want to use appears. D Press {#Enter}. I Press {On Line}. The following message appears on the panel display. Take Offline Then Press Reset J Press {On Line}. The On Line indicator turns off and the printer is offline. K Press {Reset}. The printer is reset and the settings are available. L Print the configuration page to check settings you have made. A Press {Menu}. B Press {T} or {U} until the List Print appears. C After confirming that Config.Page is on the display, press {#Enter}. D Press {#Enter}. The configuration page is now printed. Check the contents of the configuration page. E Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display. -Address Subnet Mask A number used to mathematically mask or hide the IP addresses on the network by eliminating those parts of the address that are alike for all the machines on the network. Gateway Address A gateway is a connection or interchange point that connects two networks. A gateway address is for the router or host computer used as a gateway. To get the above two addresses, contact your network administrator. If you do not know the addresses, please use the default settings. Access Control Address and Access Control Mask Access Control Address and Access Control Mask are used to control the IP addresses that have access to the computer used for printing, with the IP address. If it is not necessary for you to control the access rights, select

45 Configuring the Printer for the Network with the Operation Panel When the Access Control Address settings coincide with the masked result of the IP address of the computer, print jobs from that IP address can be accepted by the Network Interface Board. For example, if you assign as the Access Control Address to the Network Interface Board, the combination of the Access Control Mask and IP address that can have access are as follows. 3 Access Control Mask IP addresses that have access xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx xxx Limitation These settings control only printing requests. 33

46 Configuring the Printer for the Network 3 34

47 4. Installing the Printer Driver and Software This manual assumes that you are familiar with general Windows procedures and practices. If you are not, see the documentation that comes with Windows for details. Installation Method The following table shows how to install the printer drivers and software. Auto Run *1 Typical *2 Network *3 Custom *4 Add Printer Wizard IPDL-C printer driver RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT PortNavi Multidirect Print Acrobat Reader *1 Available operating systems are as follows: Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0 *2 Recommended for most users. *3 Recommended for network printing users. *4 Recommended for expert users. Reference For more information about the printer drivers, see P.3 Printer Drivers for This Printer. For installing the printer drivers, see P.38 Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver or P.42 Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver. For more information about the software and utilities, see P.4 Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM. Important Before starting this installation, close all documents and applications. In a network environment, confirm that users who are logged on are disconnected. Be sure to do this when it will create the least interference with other users. After installing a printer driver, you must restart the computer. 35

48 Installing the Printer Driver and Software If the "plug and play" function is started, click [Cancel] in the [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver Wizard] or [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, and then insert the CD-ROM. The [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver Wizard] or [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears depending on the system version of the Windows 95/98/Me or Windows The appropriate language name is used for the CD-ROM folder: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German), FRANCAIS (French), ITALIANO (Italian), ESPANOL (Spanish), NEDRLNDS (Dutch), NORSK (Norwegian), DANSK (Danish), SVENSKA (Swedish) 4 User Codes User Codes are eight digit codes that allow you to keep track of printing done under each code. To use this feature, the network administrator should assign User Codes and inform users of them before they install the printer driver. With the IPDL-C printer driver, if you want to set a User Code, you must do it when installing the printer driver. With the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver, only [Off] or [On] can be selected. The numerical value cannot be changed. If [On] is selected, is automatically set as a default. So if you want to distinguish between the RICOH-SCRIPT2 and IPDL-C printer drivers, set the different User Code in the IPDL-C printer driver. In Windows 95/98/Me, if you want to change the User Code, reinstalling the printer driver is required. In Windows 95/98/Me, changing the printer name makes the User Code ineffective. If you want to set the User Code again, reinstalling the printer driver is required. -Using the Shared Printer on Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0 for Windows 95/98/Me Client If you want to share the printer on Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0, install the printer driver for Windows 95/98/Me for an alternate driver. When using the alternate driver function with the Windows NT 4.0, use the Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 4 or later. For more information about installing the printer driver as an alternate driver, see P.39 Windows Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver or P.40 Windows NT Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver. 36

49 Installing by Auto Run Installing by Auto Run You can install the IPDL-C printer driver and software, and set them up easily by using Auto Run. Follow these steps to install the IPDL-C printer driver and software on Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0. Limitation If your system is Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0, installing a printer driver by Auto Run requires Administrators permission. When you install a printer driver by Auto Run, log on using an account that has Administrators permission. Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "INSTTOOL.EXE" located on the CD-ROM root directory. If you want to cancel Auto Run, hold down the {SHIFT} key (when your system is Windows 2000, hold down the left {SHIFT} key) while inserting the CD- ROM. Keep the {SHIFT} key held down until the computer has finished accessing the CD-ROM. A Close all applications that are running. B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. C Follow the instructions on the screen. D Restart the computer after installation is complete. E Set up the options with the printer driver. 4 37

50 Installing the Printer Driver and Software Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver Windows 95/98/Me - Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver Installing the printer driver Install the driver in accordance with the steps explained. P.37 Installing by Auto Run 4 Setting up options When setting up options, you should access the Printer Properties from Windows. You cannot access the Printer Properties from an application. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Setup] tab, and then click [Installable Options]. The [Installable Options] dialog box appears. D From the [Option Tray:] and [Total Printer Memory:] boxes, select any options you have installed. Selecting the wrong tray here will make it impossible to use the tray correctly. Selecting the wrong amount of memory here may cause printing problems. Be sure to change this setting whenever you add more memory. If the optional paper feed unit and the optional duplex unit are installed, simply check the[duplex] check box, and the paper feed unit will automatically be selected in the[option Tray:] box. Automatic duplex printing becomes possible with the printer. Reference You can confirm how much memory the printer is currently equipped with by printing a configuration page. "Printing the Configuration Page" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM E Click [OK]. F Click [OK]. 38

51 Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver Windows Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver Installing the printer driver Install the driver in accordance with the steps explained. P.37 Installing by Auto Run During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box might appear. In this case, click [Yes] to continue the installation. If you want to share the printer on Windows NT 2000, use the [Sharing] tab in the Printer Properties to specify the alternate printer driver. For details, see the instructions manual of the Windows When prompted for the Windows 95/98/Me alternate printer driver location, select the following folder in the CD-ROM. \DRIVERS\IPDL-C\WIN9X_ME\DISK1\ 4 Setting up options Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. When setting up options, you should access the Printer Properties from Windows. You cannot access the Printer Properties from an application. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Installable Options] tab. 39

52 Installing the Printer Driver and Software D From the [Option Tray:] and [Total Printer Memory:] boxes, select any options you have installed. Selecting the wrong tray here will make it impossible to use the tray correctly. Selecting the wrong amount of memory here may cause printing problems. Be sure to change this setting whenever you add more memory. If the optional paper feed unit and the optional duplex unit are installed, simply check the[duplex] check box, and the paper feed unit will automatically be selected in the[option Tray:] box. Automatic duplex printing becomes possible with the printer. 4 Reference You can confirm how much memory the printer is currently equipped with by printing a configuration page. "Printing the Configuration Page" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM E Click [OK]. Windows NT Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver Installing the printer driver Install the driver in accordance with the steps explained. P.37 Installing by Auto Run If you want to share the printer on Windows NT 4.0, use the [Sharing]tab in the Printer Properties to specify the alternate printer driver. (For details, refer to the instructions manual of the Windows 4.0.) When prompted for the Windows 95/98/Me alternate driver location, select the following folder in the CD-ROM. \DRIVERS\IPDL-C\WIN9X_ME\DISK1\ Setting up options Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on under Full Control permission. When setting up options, you should access the Printer Properties from Windows. You cannot access the Printer Properties from an application. 40

53 Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Installable Options] tab. D From the [Option Tray:] and [Total Printer Memory:] boxes, select any options you have installed. Selecting the wrong tray here will make it impossible to use the tray correctly. Selecting the wrong amount of memory here may cause printing problems. Be sure to change this setting whenever you add more memory. If the optional paper feed unit and the optional duplex unit are installed, simply check the[duplex] check box, and the paper feed unit will automatically be selected in the[option Tray:] box. Automatic duplex printing becomes possible with the printer. 4 Reference You can confirm how much memory the printer is currently equipped with by printing a configuration page. "Printing the Configuration Page" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM E Click [OK]. 41

54 Installing the Printer Driver and Software Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Windows 95/98/Me - Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver With Windows 95/98/Me, you should install both the Windows 95/98/Me PostScript printer driver and the PPD file. Be sure to install the PPD file for Windows 95/98/Me. Do not accidentally install the PPD file for Windows 2000 or Windows NT Installing the printer driver Preparation The Windows 95/98 operating system CD-ROM or diskettes are required for installing the printer driver. The following procedure describes installation when the printer is connected to the computer via a parallel interface. A Close all applications that are currently running. B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. C Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. [Add Printer Wizard] starts. D Click [Next]. E Click [Local printer], and then click [Next]. A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears. F Click [Have Disk]. A dialog box for installing a driver from a disk appears. G Press the {SHIFT} key and insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Keep the {SHIFT} key pressed until the computer has finished accessing the CD-ROM. If the Auto Run program starts, click [Cancel]. 42

55 Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver H Click [Browse]. The Windows 95/98/Me printer driver is in the following folder in the CD-ROM: \DRIVERS\RPS2\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\ I In the box, double-click [DRIVERS], [RPS2] and [WIN9X_ME]. Then doubleclick the folder of the appropriate language. Finally, click [OK]. J Click [OK]. A dialog box for selecting the printer model appears. K Click the name of the printer you want to install, and then click [Next]. A dialog box for selecting the printer port appears. L From the [Available ports:] box, select the printer port, and then click [Next]. M Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next]. N In the next dialog box asking if you want to print a test page, select [No] and then click [Finish]. The installer copies the printer driver files from the CD-ROM to the computer's hard disk. 4 Print a test page after completing installation and restarting Windows. O If you are asked to insert the Windows 95/98 system disk, insert it in the computer, and then click [OK]. P If you are asked to provide the location of the required file for Windows 95/ 98, do the following: Select the [WIN95] or [WIN98] folder on the system disk. Navigate to the folder where Windows is installed. Then, select the appropriate folder. The location of the appropriate folder may differ depending on the version of your operating system. The following are examples: \WINDOWS\SYSTEM\OPTION\CABS \WINDOWS\OPTION\CABS Q Restart the computer. R Set up any options with the printer driver. 43

56 Installing the Printer Driver and Software Setting up options 4 When setting up options, you should access the Printer Properties from Windows. You cannot set up options when accessing the Printer Properties from an application. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Device Options] tab. D From the [Installable options] box, select the options you have installed. The current settings are displayed in the [Change settings for:] list box. The following items are available here: [Option Tray], [VMOption]. E Use the [Change settings for:] list box to select the appropriate setting for the selected option. F Click [Apply] to apply the settings you made. G After making all settings you want, click [OK]. Reference You can confirm that how much memory the printer is currently equipped with by printing a configuration page. "Printing the Configuration Page" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM 44

57 Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Windows Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver With Windows 2000, you should install both the Windows 2000 PostScript driver and the PPD file. Limitation Installing a printer driver requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators, and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you install a printer driver, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Be sure to install the PPD file for Windows Do not accidentally install the PPD file for Windows 95/98/Me or Windows NT 4.0. Installing the printer driver 4 Preparation The following procedure describes installation when the printer is connected to the computer via a parallel interface. A Close all applications that are currently running. B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. C Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. [Add Printer Wizard] starts. D Click [Next]. E Click [Local printer], clear the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer] check box, and then click [Next]. A dialog box for selecting the printer port appears. F Click the port you want to use, and then click [Next]. A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears. G Click [Have Disk]. A dialog box for installing a driver from a disk appears. H Press the left {SHIFT} key and insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Keep the left {SHIFT} key pressed until the computer has finished accessing the CD-ROM. If the Auto Run program starts, click [Cancel]. 45

58 Installing the Printer Driver and Software I Click [Browse]. 4 The Windows 2000 printer driver is in the following folder in the CD- ROM: \DRIVERS\RPS2\WIN2000\(Language)\ J In the box, double-click [DRIVERS], [RPS2] and [WIN2000]. Then double-click the folder of the appropriate language for the operating system. Finally, click [Open]. K Click [OK]. A dialog box for selecting the printer model appears. L Click the name of the printer you want to install, and then click [Next]. A dialog box for changing the printer name appears. M Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next]. N Click [Next]. O In the next dialog box asking if you want to print a test page, select [No] and then click [Next]. A confirmation dialog box appears. Print a test page after completing installation and restarting Windows. P Confirm the settings you have set, and then click [Finish]. The installer copies the printer driver files from the CD-ROM to the computer's hard disk. If the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box appears, click [Yes] to continue the installation. Q Restart the computer after installation is complete. R Set up any options with the printer driver. 46

59 Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Setting up options Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. When setting up options, you should access the Printer Properties from Windows. You cannot set up options when accessing the Printer Properties from an application. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Device Settings] tab. D From the [Installable Options] list, select the options you have installed. The following items are available here: [Total Printer Memory:], [Option Tray:], and [Duplex Unit:]. E Click [Apply] to apply the settings you made. F After making all settings you want, click [OK]. Reference You can confirm that how much the printer is currently equipped with by printing a configuration page. "Printing the Configuration Page" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM 4 47

60 Installing the Printer Driver and Software Windows NT Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver With Windows NT 4.0, you should install both the Windows NT 4.0 PostScript driver and the PPD file. 4 Limitation Installing a printer driver requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on under Full Control permission. We recommend that you upgrade your Windows NT 4.0 operating system to the latest version before installing the printer driver. Contact your Windows retailer for details about the latest version available. Be sure to install the PPD file for Windows NT 4.0. Do not accidentally install the PPD file for Windows 95/98/Me or Windows Installing the printer driver 48 Preparation The CD-ROM containing the Windows NT Server operating system version 4.0, or the Windows NT Workstation operating system is required for installing the printer driver. The following procedure describes installation when the printer is connected to the computer via a parallel interface. A Close all applications that are currently running. B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. C Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. [Add Printer Wizard] starts. D After confirming that the [My Computer] option is selected, click [Next]. A dialog box for selecting the printer port appears. E Click the check box of the printer port you want to use, and then click [Next]. A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears. F Click [Have Disk]. A dialog box for installing a driver from a disk appears. G Press the {SHIFT} key and insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Keep the {SHIFT} key pressed until the computer has finished accessing the CD-ROM. If the Auto Run program starts, click [Cancel].

61 Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver H Click [Browse]. The Windows NT 4.0 printer driver is in the following folder in the CD- ROM: \DRIVERS\RPS2\NT4\(Language)\ I In the box, double-click [DRIVERS], [RPS2] and [NT4]. Then double-click the folder of the appropriate language. Finally, click [Open]. J Click [OK]. A printer model selection dialog box appears. K Click the name of the printer you want to install, and then click [Next]. A dialog box for changing the printer name appears. L Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next]. M Click [Next]. N In the next dialog box asking if you want to print a test page, select [No] and then click [Finish]. The installer copies the printer driver files from the CD-ROM to the computer's hard disk. 4 Print a test page after completing installation and restarting Windows. O If you are asked to insert the Windows NT 4.0 system disk, insert it in the computer, and then click [OK]. P If you are asked to provide the drive of the system disk, use the drive containing the Windows NT 4.0 system disk. Q If you are asked to provide the location of the required file, select the appropriate folder. The location of the appropriate folder may differ depending on the version of your operating system. The following is an example: Folder named [i386] on the Windows NT 4.0 system disk. R Restart the computer after installation is complete. S Set up any options with the printer driver. 49

62 Installing the Printer Driver and Software Setting up options Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on under Full Control permission. 4 When setting up options, you should access the Printer Properties from Windows. You cannot set up options when accessing the Printer Properties from an application. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Device Settings] tab. D From the [Installable Options] list, select the options you have installed. The following items are available here: [Total Printer Memory:], [Option Tray:], and [Duplex Unit:]. E Click [Apply] to apply the settings you made. F After making all settings you want, click [OK]. Reference You can confirm that how much memory the printer is currently equipped with by printing a configuration page. "Printing the Configuration Page" in the "Printer Reference" included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM 50

63 Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0 or 6.5 You should install the PPD file for PostScript printing with Adobe PageMaker. Installing the PPD files A Close Adobe PageMaker if it is currently running. B Press the {SHIFT} key and insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Keep the {SHIFT} key press until the computer has finished accessing the CD-ROM. If the Auto Run program starts, click [Cancel]. C Select the CD-ROM drive. D In the box, double-click [DRIVERS], [RPS2] and [PM6]. Then double-click the folder of the appropriate language. You can see the PPD file. E Copy the PPD file into the appropriate folder. The location of the appropriate folder may differ depending on the version of software or how you installed the software on your operating system. The following are examples: Adobe PageMaker version 6.0: PM6\RSRC\PPD4 Adobe PageMaker version 6.5: PM65\RSRC\(Language)\PPD4 4 Selecting the PPD files A Launch Adobe PageMaker. B On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print Document] dialog box appears. C From the [Printers] list box, select the printer you want to use. Confirm that RPS is shown after the printer name. D In the [PPD] list box, select the printer you want to use. 51

64 Installing the Printer Driver and Software Macintosh Use the Macintosh LaserWriter 8 driver that comes with your operating system. Important For more information about the functions of the LaserWriter 8 printer driver, see the documentation that comes with your operating system. The PPD file is not compatible with QuickDrawGX. The LaserWriter printer driver for a Macintosh does not come with this printer. Use the appropriate printer driver that comes with the Macintosh operating system you are using. 4 Reference This manual describes only the settings specific to this printer. Settings actually may differ depending on the version of the LaserWriter driver you are using. For more information about the LaserWriter functions, see the documentation that comes with the Macintosh. The versions of the LaserWriter driver are separated into two categories. "LaserWriter 8.3x or earlier" refers to the LaserWriter 8.3x driver and all drivers before that. "LaserWriter 8.4x or later" refers to LaserWriter 8.4x, 8.6x and 8.7. LaserWriter 8.6x was used to make this manual. The settings may differ depending on the version of the LaserWriter driver being used. Installing the PPD files 52 Limitation Be sure to install the PPD file correctly. If not installed correctly, you cannot use it, even though it is physically installed on the printer. A Start the Macintosh. B Double-click the hard disk icon, and then double-click the [Extensions] folder inside the [System Folder]. C Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. D Double-click the CD-ROM icon. The contents of the CD-ROM appear. E Double-click the [PRINTER DESCRIPTIONS] folder in the CD-ROM, and then double-click the folder having the appropriate language name. F Select the appropriate PPD file for the printer. G Copy the PPD file in the [Printer Descriptions] folder located inside the [Extensions] folder. The PPD file is installed.

65 Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Installing the ColorSync profiles ColorSync profiles make it possible for the printer to print colors of similar intensity to those that appear on the computer display. You must install the ColorSync profiles to use this feature. The ColorSync profiles conform with the color characteristics defined by the International Color Consortium (ICC). Some computer displays may require particular settings to be controlled by ColorSync. For more information, see the documentation that comes with your display. The following profiles are provided for the printer. Transparency Adjusts the image density to optimize the output for overhead projectors. This profile is selected automatically whenever [OHP Transparency] is selected as the paper type. 4 Presentation Enhances the reproduction of documents that contain text and graphics. This profile is best for printing charts, colored graphs, presentation materials and so on. Photograph Use this profile to enhance the reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones. Solid Color Use this profile for printing specific colors, logos and so on. The following procedure describes how to install the ColorSync Profiles. A Start the Macintosh. B Double-click the hard disk icon, and then open the appropriate folder for installing the ColorSync profiles. The location of the appropriate folder may differ depending on the version of the operating system. The following are examples: System: Preferences: ColorSync Profiles System: ColorSync Profiles C Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The icon of the CD-ROM appears. D Double-click the CD-ROM icon. The contents of the CD-ROM appear. 53

66 Installing the Printer Driver and Software E Double-click the [ColorSync Profiles] folder in the CD-ROM. F Copy all four files in the [ColorSync Profiles] folder. The ColorSync profiles are installed. Setting up the PPD file 4 Preparation Confirm that the printer is connected to an AppleTalk network before performing the following procedure. A On the Apple menu, select [Chooser]. B Click the [LaserWriter 8] icon. C In the [Select a PostScript Printer] list, click the name of the printer you want to use, and then click [Create]. If your network has multiple zones, click the name of the zone the printer belongs to in the [AppleTalk Zones] list in the lower left side of the [Chooser] dialog box. D Click the name of the printer, and then click [Select]. Be sure to select the PPD file correctly. If the correct PPD file is not selected, certain options may not be available. The PPD file is set up and the LaserWriter 8 icon appears at the left of the printer name in the list. Next, follow the procedure on P.54 Setting up options to make the option settings, or to close the [Chooser] dialog box. Setting up options A On the Apple menu, select [Chooser]. B Click the [LaserWriter 8] icon. C In the [Select a PostScript Printer] list, click the name of the printer you want to use, and then click [Setup]. 54 If your network has multiple zones, click the name of the zone the printer belongs to in the [AppleTalk Zones] list in the lower left side of the [Chooser] dialog box. D Click [Configure]. A list of options appears.

67 Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver E Select the option you want to set up and the appropriate settings for it. If the option you want to set up does not appear, the PPD file has not been set up correctly. Check the name of the PPD file shown in the dialog box. Reference For more information about setting up options, see the Operating Instructions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. F Click [OK]. The list of options closes. G Click [OK]. The [Chooser] dialog box appears. 4 Installing screen fonts The screen fonts described below can be found in the CD-ROM, in the folder named [Fonts]. Screen fonts are 10, 12, 14, 18 and 24 point bitmap fonts. Other sizes make characters appear with ragged edges on the computer screen but they print with smooth edges. The screen fonts included on the CD-ROM are as follows: AG-Ricoh, HN- Ricoh, CS-Ricoh, BM-Ricoh, ZC-Ricoh, ZD-Ricoh. A Start the Macintosh. B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM icon appears. C Double-click the CD-ROM icon. The contents of the CD-ROM appear. D Copy the fonts you want to install in the [System] folder. A confirmation dialog box appears. E Click [OK]. The fonts are installed. F Restart the Macintosh. The names of the fonts you have installed appear in the pull-down menu when you select fonts with applications. 55

68 Installing the Printer Driver and Software -Screen Fonts Screen fonts are bitmap fonts, which are formed by grouping dots together. Because of this, screen fonts appear jagged on your computer screen when you enlarge or reduce them. It is recommended that you install as many different sizes as possible for each font to avoid such jagged appearances. Screen fonts are provided for this printer in 10, 12, 14, 18 and 24 point sizes. 4 56

69 INDEX A Access Control Address, 29, 32 Access Control Mask, 29, 32 Active Protocol, 29 AD390, 14 Adobe PageMaker, 51 Auto Run, 37 C D ColorSync, 53 Data In indicator, 9 duplex printer, 2 duplex unit, 14 install, 25 E {#Enter} key, 8 Error indicator, 8 {Escape} key, 9 F Frame type NetWare, 29 front cover, 5 front cover open lever, 6 fuser cleaner, 7 fuser oil bottle, 7 G Gateway Address, 29, 32 I L inset grips, 6 install Adobe PageMaker, PPD, 51 duplex unit, 25 Macintosh, ColorSync, 53 Macintosh, PPD, 52 Macintosh, screen fonts, 55 memory unit, 15 network interface board, 17 Paper Cassette Type204 (legal), 20 PAPER FEED UNIT Type206, 21 Windows 2000, IPDL-C, 39 Windows 2000, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 45 Windows 95/98/Me, IPDL-C, 38 Windows 95/98/Me, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 42 Windows NT 4.0, IPDL-C, 40 Windows NT 4.0, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 48 IP Address, 29 IPDL-C printer driver, 3 IPDL-C printer driver Windows 2000, install, 39 Windows 95/98/Me, install, 38 Windows NT 4.0, install, 40 M LaserWriter, 52 Macintosh, 52 install, PPD, 52 main power switch, 6 {Media} key, 8 memory unit, 14 install, 15 Memory Unit Type B (128MB), 14 Memory Unit Type B (32MB), 14 Memory Unit Type B (64MB), 14 {Menu} key, 8 Multidirect Print, 4 57

70 N Network Boot, 29 network interface board, 14 install, 17 Network Interface Board Operating Instructions, v Network Interface Board Type306, 14 O On Line indicator, 8 {On Line} key, 8 operation panel, 5, 8 options, 13 output tray, 6 P panel display, 8 paper cassette, 14 Paper Cassette Type204, 14 Paper Cassette Type204 (legal) install, 20 paper feed unit, 14 PAPER FEED UNIT Type206, 14 install, 21 paper stopper, 5 paper tray, 5 parallel interface connector, 6 photoconductor unit, 7 PortNavi, 4 power connector, 6 Power indicator, 8 power switch, 5 PPD, 3 Macintosh, install, 52 Macintosh, set up, 54 printer board, 6 printer driver, 3 Printer Reference, v Q Quick Installation Guide, v R rear cover, 6 {Reset} key, 9 RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions, v RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver, 3 RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver Windows 2000, install, 45 Windows 95/98/Me, install, 42 Windows NT 4.0, install, 48 S T screen fonts, 55 Setup Guide, v simplex printer, 2 Subnet Mask, 29, 32 toner cartridges, 7 top cover, 5 top cover open lever, 6 U UNIX Supplement, v User Code, 36 V W ventilator, 6 waste toner bottle, 7 Windows 2000 install, IPDL-C, 39 install, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 45 Windows 95/98/Me install, IPDL-C, 38 install, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 42 Windows NT 4.0 install, IPDL-C, 40 install, RICOH-SCRIPT2, UE USA G063

71 to users in the United States of America Notice: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/tv technician for help. Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Caution (in case of 100BaseTX environment): Properly shielded and grounded cables (STP) and connectors must be used for connections to host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits. Declaration of Conformity Product Name: Printer Model Number: AP206/SLP6c/C7006 Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ Telephone number: This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Properly shielded cables must be used for connections to host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits. Network interface cable with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression. to users in Canada : This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada Avertissement: Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch: a means POWER ON. b means POWER OFF. Copyright 2000

72 UE USA G

73 Operating Instructions Printer Reference Zdgh010j.eps Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.

74 Introduction This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS. s: The name of the applications do not appear in the following pages. Confirm which applications you will be using before reading this manual. Descriptions in this manual PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT Application Aficio Manager for Admin Net Vision for Admin Aficio Manager for Client Net Vision for Client Power Source 120 V, 50/60 Hz, 11 A or more Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. Operator Safety: This machine is considered a CDRH class 1 laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The machine contains 5-milliwatt, nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator. Laser Safety: The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required. Important Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine. Caution: Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This machine contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye damage. Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version. Supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other than genuine supplier's parts in your supplier's office product. For good copy quality, supplier recommends that you use genuine supplier's toner.

75 Trademarks RICOH-SCRIPT2 is a registered trademark of Ricoh Company. Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe, PostScript, Acrobat and PageMaker are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. AppleTalk, Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Incorporated. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks. s: Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine. Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer. s: The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: Microsoft Windows 95 operating system Microsoft Windows 98 operating system Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me) Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system Version 4.0 Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system Version 4.0 i

76 Safety Information When using your equipment, the following safety precautions should always be followed. Safety During Operation In this manual, the following important symbols are used: R WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury. R CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property. R WARNING: Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension cord. Confirm that the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible, so that in event of an emergency, it can be unplugged easily. Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the power cable or plug becomes frayed or damaged. To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual. Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if any of the following conditions exist: You spill something into the equipment. You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair. Your equipment's cover has been damaged. Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust is flammable and might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or appropriate collection site. If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to local regulations. ii

77 R CAUTION: Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow, and so on. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment. While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the equipment. When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the cable). Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside the equipment. Do not eat or swallow toner. Keep toner (used or unused) and toner cartridge out of reach of children. For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended supplies at a household waste collection point. Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or an appropriate collection site. Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using only those specified by an authorized dealer. The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts with a label indicating a hot surface. Touching a hot surface could result in a burn injury. If you use this printer in a cold area, leave the printer on. Otherwise, severe cold might damage sensitive components inside the printer. iii

78 Energy Star Program As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency. The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming. When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model. This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode. Low-power mode (Energy Saver mode) This printer automatically lowers its power consumption 60 minutes after the last operation has been completed when the Energy Level is set to level 1. To exit Low-power (Energy Saver) mode, press any key on the operation panel. To change the setting of the Energy Saver mode, see P.79 Using the Operation Panel. Specifications Lower-power mode (Energy Saver mode) Power Consumption Default Time 35 W or less 30 minutes -Recycled Paper In accordance with the ENERGY STAR Program, we recommend use of recycled paper which is environment friendly. Please contact your sales representative for recommended paper. iv

79 Manuals for This Printer There are six manuals that separately describe the procedures for the installation of the printer and for the operation and maintenance of the printer and its optional equipment. To enhance safe and efficient operation of the printer, all users should read and follow the instructions contained in the following manuals. Quick Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installing the printer. Setup Guide Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about setting up the printer and its options. Printer Reference Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about using the printer and its options. The manual is included as a PDF file on the CD- ROM (this manual). RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions Describes the menus and features you can set using the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver. The manual is provided as a PDF file which is included on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. Network Interface Board Operating Instructions Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about setting up and using the printer in a network environment. The manual is provided as a PDF file which is included on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. UNIX Supplement Provides information about setting up and using the printer in a UNIX environment. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. v

80 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury. R CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property. * The statements above are notes for your safety. Important If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating. This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation. Limitation This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together, or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used. Reference This symbol indicates a reference. [ ] Keys that appear on the machine's panel display. Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display. { } Keys built into the machine's operation panel. Keys on the computer's keyboard. vi

81 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job IPDL-C Accessing the Printer Properties... 1 Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties... 1 Windows Accessing the Printer Properties... 2 Windows NT Accessing the Printer Properties... 4 RICOH-SCRIPT2 - Setting Up for Printing... 6 Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties... 6 Windows Accessing the Printer Properties... 8 Windows NT Accessing the Printer Properties Macintosh - Setting Up for Printing Canceling a Print Job Windows 95/98/Me - Canceling a Print Job Windows Canceling a Print Job Windows NT Canceling a Print Job Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver Windows Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver Windows NT Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Windows Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Windows NT Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Macintosh - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Paper and Other Media Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Paper Types and Sizes Paper Recommendations Printable Area Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Paper Tray Loading Paper in the PAPER FEED UNIT Type Switching between Paper Trays vii

82 4.Troubleshooting Error & Status Messages Printed Error Messages Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel Getting Printer Information over the Network Printer Does Not Print Other Printing Problems Removing Misfed Paper When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Paper Tray" Appears When the Message "Open Rear Cover Remove Misfeed" Appears When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Output Tray" Appears When the Message "Open DuplexCover Remove Misfeed" Appears Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer Cleaning the Charge Wire Adjusting the Image Density Adjusting the Setting of Registration of the Paper Tray Replacing Consumables Replacing the Toner Cartridge Replacing the Photoconductor Unit Replacing the Fuser Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle Replacing the Fuser Cleaner Using the Operation Panel Setting Menus Protecting the Menus Protecting the Menus Removing Protection Menu Table Menu Settings IPDL-C Menu RPS2 Menu System Menu Maintenance Menu Changing the Printer Language Printing the Configuration Page Interpreting the Configuration Page Interpreting the Configuration Page/IPDL-C Interpreting the Configuration Page/RICOH-SCRIPT Printing the Color Sample Resetting Menus viii

83 Administering Printing by User Code Viewing the Number of Pages Printed Under Each User Code Reading the Statistics Report Protecting the User Code Record Deleting the User Code Record Using the Job Log Printing the Job Log Reading the Job Log Appendix Color Guide Color Printing Basics Memory Capacity and Paper Size Low Memory Moving and Transporting the Printer Specifications Mainframe Options Consumables INDEX ix

84 x

85 1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job IPDL-C Accessing the Printer Properties Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties There are two methods you can use to open the Printer Properties. Making printer default settings To make the printer default settings, first open the Printer Properties from the [Printers] window. The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating system. Windows 95: [General], [Details] and [Sharing] Windows 98/Me: [General], [Details], [Color Management] and [Sharing] Profiles set on the [Color Management] tab are not supported. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. C On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties appear. D Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. Making printer settings from an application To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95/98/Me. The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printer Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information about the procedures, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. 1

86 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 1 When you use some applications, the driver's initial default settings of the applications might be applied over the printer driver's setting. Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. A On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print] dialog box appears. B From the [Name:] list, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties]. The Printer Properties appear. C Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. D Click [OK] to start printing. Windows Accessing the Printer Properties There are three methods you can use to open the Printer Properties. Making printer default settings - Printer Properties Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating system. [General], [Sharing], [Ports], [Advanced], [Color Management] and [Security] A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer whose default setting you want to change. C On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties appear. D Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. 2

87 IPDL-C Accessing the Printer Properties Making printer default settings Printing Preferences Properties Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences]. The Printing Preferences Properties appear. D Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. 1 Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer settings from an application To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printing Preferences Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printing Preferences Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. A On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print] dialog box appears. B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] box. C Make desired settings, and then click [Apply] to start printing. 3

88 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job Windows NT Accessing the Printer Properties 1 There are three methods you can use to open the Printer Properties. Making printer default settings - Printer Properties Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on under Full Control permission. The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating system. [General], [Ports], [Scheduling], [Sharing] and [Security] A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer whose default setting you want to change. C On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties appear. D Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer default settings Default Document Properties Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on under Full Control permission. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults]. The Default Document Properties appear. 4

89 IPDL-C Accessing the Printer Properties D Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer settings from an application 1 To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Document Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows NT 4.0. The actual procedures you should follow to open the Document Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information about the procedures, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. A On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print] dialog box appears. B From the [Name:] list, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties]. The Document Properties appear. C Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. D Click [OK] to start printing. 5

90 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job RICOH-SCRIPT2 - Setting Up for Printing 1 Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties There are two methods you can use to open the Printer Properties. Making printer default settings To make the printer default settings, first open the Printer Properties from the [Printers] window. The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating system. Windows 95: [General], [Details] and [Sharing] Windows 98/Me: [General], [Details], [Color Management] and [Sharing] Profiles set on the [Color Management] tab are not supported. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties appear. C Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. Reference For more information about making printer default settings, see the Operating Instructions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Making printer settings from an application To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95. 6

91 RICOH-SCRIPT2 - Setting Up for Printing The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printer Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information about the procedures, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. When you use some applications, the driver's initial default settings of the applications might be applied over the printer driver's setting. Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. A On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print] window appears. B From the [Name:] box, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties]. The Printer Properties appear. C Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. Reference For more information about each tab, see the Operating Instruction for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. 1 D Click [OK] to start printing. 7

92 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job Windows Accessing the Printer Properties 1 There are three methods you can use to open the Printer Properties. Making printer default settings - Printer Properties Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. With some applications, the printer driver's settings are not used, and the application's own initial default settings are applied. The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating system. [General], [Sharing], [Ports], [Advanced], [Color Management] and [Security] A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer whose default setting you want to change. C On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties appear. D Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. Reference For more information about making printer default settings, see the Operating Instructions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer default settings Printing Preferences Properties Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. 8

93 RICOH-SCRIPT2 - Setting Up for Printing A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences]. The Printing Preferences Properties appear. D Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. 1 Reference For more information about making printer default settings, see the Operating Instructions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer settings from an application To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printing Preferences Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows General users can change the settings in an application's [Print] window. The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printing Preferences Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. A On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print] window appears. B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] box. C Make desired settings, and then click [Print] to start printing. Reference For more information about each tab, see the Operating Instruction for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. D Click [OK] to start printing. 9

94 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job Windows NT Accessing the Printer Properties 1 There are three methods you can use to open the Printer Properties. Making printer default settings - Printer Properties Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on under Full Control permission. With some applications, the printer driver's settings are not used, and the application's own initial default settings are applied. The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating system. [General], [Ports], [Scheduling], [Sharing] and [Security] A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties appear. Reference For more information about making printer default settings, see the Operating Instructions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer default settings - Default Document Properties A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults]. The Default Document Properties appear. 10

95 RICOH-SCRIPT2 - Setting Up for Printing Reference For more information about making printer default settings, see the Operating Instructions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Settings you make here are used as the default settings when printing from applications. 1 Making printer settings from an application To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Document Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows NT 4.0. General users can change the settings in an application's [Print] window. The actual procedures you should follow to open the Document Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information about the procedures, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. A On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print] window appears. B From the [Name:] box, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties]. The Printer Properties appear. C Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. Reference For more information about each tab, see the Operating Instruction for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. D Click [OK] to start printing. 11

96 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job Macintosh - Setting Up for Printing 1 Making paper settings from an application A Open the file you want to print. B On the [File] menu, click [Page Setup]. [LaserWriter 8 Page Setup] appears. C Confirm that the printer you want to use is shown in the [Format for:] box. If the printer is now shown in the [Format for:] box, use the pop-up menu to display a list of available printers. Reference The actual appearance of the Page Setup depends on the application you are using. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the Macintosh. D From the [Paper:] box, select the paper size. E Make desired settings, and then click [OK]. -Small Size Print Area This printer supports printing on print areas such as A4 Small and Letter Small when printing from a Macintosh only with specific versions of the driver. The LaserWriter 8.4x (or later) driver supports printing on both standard and small print areas. However, with LaserWriter 8.3x (or earlier), the small print area options are not displayed. With LaserWriter 8.3x (or earlier), select A4, for example, and click [Options] in the [Page Setup] dialog box, then use the [Larger Print Area] option. Checking [Larger Print Area] produces the same printing result as LaserWriter 8.4x (or later) standard A4 print area. Unchecking the [Larger Print Area] produces the same result as the LaserWriter 8.4x (or later) A4 Small print area. Setting up for printing from an application A Open the file you want to print. B On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The Printer Settings appear. 12

97 RICOH-SCRIPT2 - Setting Up for Printing C Confirm that the printer is selected in the [Printer] box. D Make desired settings, and then click [Print]. Reference For more information about setting up for printing from an application, see the Operating Instructions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. 1 13

98 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job Canceling a Print Job 1 Windows 95/98/Me - Canceling a Print Job A Double-click the printer icon on the task bar. This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel. B Click the name of the job you want to cancel. C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel Printing]. You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the printer icon in the [Printers] window. D Press {Reset} on the operation panel. A message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being canceled. Important When the printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's print job. You cannot stop printing the data that has already been processed internally by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages after you press {Reset}. A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable time to stop. Windows Canceling a Print Job A Double-click the printer icon on the taskbar. This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel. B Select the name of the job you want to cancel. C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel]. You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the printer icon in the [Printers] window. 14

99 Canceling a Print Job D Press {Reset} on the operation panel. A message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being canceled. Important When the printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's print job. 1 You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages after you press {Reset}. A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable time to stop. Windows NT Canceling a Print Job A Double-click the printer icon on the task bar. This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel. B Click the name of the job you want to cancel. C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel]. You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the printer icon in the [Printers] window. D Press {Reset} on the operation panel. A message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being canceled. Important When the printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's print job. You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages after you press {Reset}. A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable time to stop. 15

100 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job 1 A Double-click the printer icon on the desktop. This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel. B Click the name of the job you want to cancel. C Click the pause icon, and then click the trash icon. D Press {Reset} on the operation panel. A message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being canceled. Important When the printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's print job. You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages after you press {Reset}. A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable time to stop. 16

101 2. Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver This section describes how to uninstall the IPDL-C printer driver. The actual procedure may differ depending on the operating system. Follow the appropriate procedure below. Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver A Close all the applications that are currently running. B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove. D On the [File] menu, click [Delete]. A confirmation dialog box appears. E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver. Windows Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver Limitation Uninstalling a printer driver requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you uninstall a printer driver, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. A Close all the applications that are currently running. B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove. D On the [File] menu, click [Delete]. A confirmation dialog box appears. E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver. 17

102 Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software Windows NT Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver 2 Limitation Uninstalling the printer driver requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you uninstall a printer driver, log on under Full Control permission. A Close all the applications that are currently running. B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove. D On the [File] menu, click [Delete]. A confirmation dialog box appears. E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver. 18

103 Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver This section describes how to uninstall the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver. The actual procedure may differ depending on the operating system. Follow the appropriate procedure below. Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver 2 A Close all applications that are currently running. B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove. D On the [File] menu, click [Delete]. A confirmation dialog box appears. E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver. Windows Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver Limitation Uninstalling a printer driver requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you uninstall a printer driver, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. A Close all the applications that are currently running. B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove. D On the [File] menu, click [Delete]. A confirmation dialog box appears. E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver. 19

104 Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software Windows NT Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver 2 Limitation Uninstalling a printer driver requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you uninstall a printer driver, log on under Full Control permission. A Close all applications that are currently running. B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove. D On the [File] menu, click [Delete]. A confirmation dialog box appears. E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver. Macintosh - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver A Drag the PPD file you want to uninstall inside the following folder to [Trash]. \System Folder\Extensions\Printer Descriptions\ B Drag the PPD file you want to uninstall inside the following folder to [Trash]. \System Folder\Preferences\Printing Prefs\Parsed PPD Folder\ 20

105 3. Paper and Other Media Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Paper Types and Sizes This section describes the type, size, feed direction, and maximum amount of paper that can be loaded into each paper tray in this printer. The "K" symbol means short-edge feed direction. This printer supports short-edge feed direction (K) only. The supported paper sizes may differ depending on the memory capacity of the printer. P.113 Memory Capacity and Paper Size Reference For more information about loading each type of paper, see P.24 Types of paper and other media. Paper sizes and paper feed directions supported by each paper tray (Metric version) Feed direction Size (mm) Standard tray (Tray 1) Paper Cassette Type204 (Tray 1) PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (Tray 2) A4 K B5 JIS K A5 K Letter K Com#10 Env K DL Env K Legal K

106 Paper and Other Media K K K Custom Size means that the size is supported and automatically recognized by the printer. means that the size is supported and needs to be selected using the operation panel. P.30 Selecting paper size using the operation panel means that the size is not supported. Paper sizes and paper feed directions supported by each paper tray (Inch version) Feed direction Size (inch) Feed direction Standard tray (Tray1) Size (mm) Paper Cassette Type204 (Tray1) Standard tray (Tray 1) PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (Tray2) Paper Cassette Type204 (Tray 1) PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (Tray 2) Letter K 8 1 / 2 " 11" Legal K 8 1 / 2 " 14" K 8.5" 13" K 8.25" 13" 8 13 K 8" 13" A4 K 10.12" 14.33" 22

107 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Feed direction Size (inch) Standard tray (Tray1) Paper Cassette Type204 (Tray1) PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (Tray2) 3 B5 JIS K 7.17" 10.12" A5 K 5.83" 8.27" Com#10 Env K 4 1 / 8 " 9 1 / 2 " DL Env K 4.33" 8.66" Custom Size means that the size is supported and automatically recognized by the printer. means that the size is supported and needs to be selected using the operation panel. P.30 Selecting paper size using the operation panel means that the size is not supported. Paper weight and number of sheets to be set Supported paper weights Maximum number of sheets (plain paper) *1 Standard tray g/m 2 (18-43 lb) 250 (82 g/m 2, 22 lb) Paper Cassette Type204 (optional) g/m 2 (18-43 lb) 250 (82 g/m 2, 22 lb) PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (optional) g/m 2 (18-28 lb) 500 (82 g/m 2, 22 lb) *1 Confirm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark indicated on the side guide of the tray. 23

108 Paper and Other Media Paper Recommendations the following suggestions when handling or selecting paper used with this printer. Loading paper 3 Important Do not use paper that is meant for an ink-jet printer. This paper may stick to the fusing unit and cause a paper misfeed. When printing on an OHP transparency that has a print side, load it with the print side up. Not taking this precaution may cause the OHP transparency to stick to the fusing unit and cause a misfeed. Use only the recommended paper types. Print quality cannot be guaranteed if other paper types are used. P.27 Paper not supported by this printer Do not use paper that has already been printed on. Storing paper Paper should always be stored properly. Improperly stored paper might result in poor print quality, paper misfeeds, or printer damage. Recommendations are as follows: Avoid storing paper in humid areas. Avoid exposing paper to direct sunlight. Store on a flat surface. Keep open reams of paper in the package in which the paper came. Types of paper and other media Plain paper The standard tray can hold up to 250 sheets. *1 PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (option) can hold up to 500 sheets. *1 *1 : Based on paper that is 80 g/m 2 (20 lb) in weight. If paper is curled or bent, straighten it before loading. Make sure that the stack of paper is no higher than the PAPER upper limit mark(t) inside the tray. Paper sizes available for the auto duplex printing are A4K, B5 JISK, LetterK, and LegalK. To use Legal size paper, Paper Cassette Type204 (option) is required. 24

109 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Thick paper If you print on paper heavier than 105 g/m 2 (28 lb) (up to 160 g/m 2 (43 lb)), use the standard tray or the Paper Cassette Type204 (option). The print quality on paper that is thicker cannot be guaranteed. Make sure that the stack of paper is not higher than the LABEL upper limit mark (T) inside the tray. The number of sheets that can be loaded may vary depending on the paper thickness and paper type. When printing on thick paper, you should select the thick paper mode with the printer driver. Auto duplex printing onto thick paper is not available. 3 Adhesive labels When printing on adhesive labels, use the standard tray or the Paper Cassette Type204 (option). Load adhesive labels into the tray with the print side face up. Remove any unused adhesive labels from the tray after you are finished printing. Leaving them in the tray can cause them to curl. When printing on adhesive labels, you should select the plain paper mode with the printer driver. The standard tray or the Paper Cassette Type204 can hold up to 30 sheets of adhesive labels. The number of sheets that can be loaded may vary depending on the paper thickness and paper type. In auto duplex printing, do not use adhesive labels. Make sure that the stack of paper is no higher than the LABEL upper limit mark (T) inside the tray. OHP transparencies When printing on OHP transparencies, use the standard tray or the Paper Cassette Type204 (option). Load OHP transparencies into the tray with the print side face up or they may stick to the fusing unit and cause a misfeed. Remove any unused OHP transparencies from the tray after you are finished printing. Leaving them in the tray may cause them to stick together. When printing on OHP transparencies, you should select the OHP transparency mode with the printer driver. 25

110 Paper and Other Media The standard tray or the Paper Cassette Type204 can hold up to 50 OHP transparency sheets. 3 The number of sheets that can be loaded may vary depending on the paper thickness and paper type. Make sure that the stack of paper is not higher than the OHP FILM upper limit mark (T) inside the tray. In auto duplex printing, do not use OHP transparencies or they may stick to the fusing unit and cause a misfeed. When printing on OHP transparencies, it may take 1 to 2 minutes before printing starts in order to keep the printer in an appropriate condition. Envelopes When printing on envelopes, use the standard tray or the Paper Cassette Type204 (option). You can select the sizes for the envelopes using the operation panel. P.79 Using the Operation Panel Recommended types of envelopes are as follows: Com#10 Env DL Env Do not stack envelopes over the limit mark. Confirm that print side is facing up. Confirm that there is no air in the envelopes before loading. To get better print quality, it is recommended that you set the right, left, top, and bottom print margins, to at least 20 mm (0.8") each. Do not print on both sides of envelopes. Load only one size and type of envelope at a time. Before loading envelopes, flatten the leading edges (sides being fed into the printer) of them by running a pencil or ruler across them. Some kinds of envelopes might cause misfeeds, wrinkles or poor printing. The print quality on envelopes may be uneven as different parts of an envelope have different thickness. Print one or two envelopes to check the print quality. Avoid using the non-supported envelopes listed on P.27 Paper not supported by this printer. Auto duplex printing onto envelopes is not available. 26

111 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Paper not supported by this printer Avoid using the following types of paper that are not supported by this printer: Paper whose weight is heavier or lighter than the limitation. Bent, folded, or creased paper Curled or twisted paper Torn paper Wrinkled paper Damp paper Paper stuck together Paper that is dry enough to emit static electricity Paper that has already been printed onto, except preprinted letterhead 3 Ink on paper from an earlier print job, another copier, an ink-jet printer or other devices could damage the fusing unit of this printer due to different fusing temperatures. Coated paper Special paper, such as thermal paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper and conductive paper Heavily textured paper Glued paper OHP transparencies for ink-jet printers Label paper on which glue or base paper is exposed Paper with clips or staples Paper with tape or ribbons attached Paper meant for an ink-jet printer Envelopes that are: damp excessively curled or twisted stuck together damaged in any way with stamps attached with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing with metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars designed to be interlocked with nicked edges or bent corners with rough, cockle, or laid finishes with any exposed adhesive, when the flap is in the sealed or closed position 27

112 Paper and Other Media Printable Area The following illustration shows the printable area for this printer. Be sure to set the print margins correctly. 4.3 mm (1/6") 4.3 mm (1/6") 4.3 mm (1/6") mm (1/6") A: printable area The above illustration shows the printable area for plain paper. For other types of paper, the margin width should be 8.6 mm (1/3 ). As for plain paper, when duplex printing is made, the top margin width will be 7 mm depending on the page. The printable area may vary depending on paper size, printer language and printer driver settings. 28

113 Loading Paper Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Paper Tray This section describes instructions for loading paper in the standard paper tray and the Paper Cassette Type204 (option). R CAUTION: The paper tray does not have a stopper. When pulling it out, be careful not to pull it strongly. If you do, the tray might fall and cause a personal injury. Reference For more information about the size and feed direction of paper that can be loaded in the tray, see P.21 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer. Custom size paper is supported by the standard tray or the Paper Cassette Type204 (option) only. (Both are referred to as Tray 1.) A Carefully pull the paper tray out of the printer and place it on a flat surface. B Slide the paper guides to positions that match the size of paper you want to load. ZDGY020J ZDGY030J C Load paper into the tray with the side to be printed facing up. 3 ZDGY040J ZDGY010J Important Confirm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark (T) inside the tray. 29

114 Paper and Other Media 3 The front and side guides should be set to the correct paper size to avoid paper feed problems. Do not mix different kinds of paper in the tray. To avoid paper multi-feeds, shuffle sheets before setting them in the tray. D Slide the paper tray completely into the printer. Important Be sure to insert the paper tray completely, or paper misfeeds might occur. If the paper size shown on the panel display differs from the size of paper actually loaded, re-adjust the position of the paper guides. Selecting paper size using the operation panel Use the following procedure to specify the paper size from the printer's operation panel after loading custom size paper into the standard paper tray. You can set the custom size paper in the standard tray or the Paper Cassette Type204 (option) only. After pressing a key, wait until the display changes as described before performing the next key operation. A Press {Media}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Media Escape The Media menu appears. <Media> j 1. Paper Tray l B Press {U} or {T} to display Paper Size, and then press {#Enter}. <Media> 2.Paper Size j l The Paper Size menu appears. <Paper Size> *Auto Detect j l C Press {U} or {T} to display Custom, and then press {#Enter}. The following message appears. <Custom> l jl/# Width 210mm D Press {U} or {T} to change the third (leftmost) digit of the paper width. Enter <Custom> l jl/# Width 110mm ZDHS021E 30

115 Loading Paper E When the third digit is the value you want, press {#Enter} to move the l pointer to the second digit. <Custom> l jl/# Width 110mm You can press {Escape} to move the pointer to the left. F Press {U} or {T} to change the second (center) digit of the paper width. <Custom> l jl/# Width 120mm G Repeat steps E and F to set the value of the first (rightmost) digit of the width. H While the pointer is located at the first (rightmost) digit of the width, press {#Enter} to advance to the length setting display. <Custom> l jl/# Length297mm I Use the same procedure as that for the width to set the three digits of the length. Move the l pointer to the left with {Escape} and to the right with {#Enter}. Press {U} and {T} to change the digit where the pointer is located. J While the l pointer is located at the first (rightmost) digit of the length, press {#Enter}. The Media menu appears. K Press {On Line}. The normal display screen appears. To change from the Custom size setting to automatic paper size detection, press {U} and {T} in step C of the above procedure to scroll to Auto Detect, and then press {#Enter}. Loading Paper in the PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 Important The paper tray cannot be pulled out completely from the paper feed unit. Do not try to pull it out forcibly. For more information about the size and feed direction of paper that can be loaded in the paper feed unit, see P.21 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer. A Slide the paper tray out until it stops. ZDGY050J 3 31

116 Paper and Other Media 3 B Slide the paper guides to positions that match the size of paper you want to load. ZDGY060J The front and side guides should be set to the correct paper size to avoid paper feed problems. Load only plain paper in the paper feed unit. To print on thick paper, adhesive labels, OHP transparencies or envelopes, use the standard tray. To avoid paper multi-feeds, shuffle sheets before loading them in the tray. D Slide the paper tray into the paper feed unit until it stops. Important Be sure to insert the paper tray completely, or paper misfeeds might occur. If the paper size shown on the panel display differs from the size of paper actually loaded, re-adjust the position of the paper guides. ZDGY070J C Load paper into the tray with the side to be printed facing up. ZDGY080J Important Confirm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark (T) inside the tray. 32

117 Loading Paper Switching between Paper Trays When paper of the same size is loaded in both the standard tray and the paper feed unit (option), and when Auto Tray Select is set with the printer driver, paper will be fed from the standard tray when you start printing. To print on paper loaded in the paper feed unit, switch the tray to be used to the paper feed unit using 1. Paper Tray in the System Menu. P.90 System Menu Printing a configuration page from tray 2 If Custom Size is applied to tray 1 (the standard tray), you cannot print a configuration page, a color sample, a job log and a statistics report using paper set in tray 1. In this case, set A4 or Letter size paper in tray 2 (optional paper feed unit), and then proceed as follows to print a desired sheet using paper set in tray 2. A Press {Media}. Power On Line Data In Reset B After confirming that 1. Paper Tray is on the display, press {#Enter}. The Paper Tray menu appears. Metric version <Paper Tray> j *Tray1/A4 l Inch version <Paper Tray> j *Tray1/8.5x11 l An asterisk (*) indicates the currently selected paper tray. C Press {U} and {T} to display Tray2/(paper size), and then press {#Enter}. This selects the paper feed unit, and the Media menu appears. D Press {On Line}. The normal display screen appears. To return to the standard tray, select Tray1/(paper size) in step C. 3 Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS021E The Media menu appears. <Media> j 1. Paper Tray l 33

118 Paper and Other Media 3 34

119 4. Troubleshooting Error & Status Messages There are three types of error and status messages. Printed error messages Error and status messages on the operation panel Printer information received from the network Printed Error Messages The error message shown below is printed by the printer whenever there is not enough memory to print data. Error message There is not enough memory in your printer to print this page.change print quality in the printer driver and try again.for details, please refer to the troubleshooting section in your manual. Required action The following are the actions you should take when you encounter memory shortage problems. If these actions do not solve the problem individually, try them in combination with each other. P.114 Low Memory A Increase printer memory. Install the optional memory unit to increase the amount of printer memory. B Reduce resolution. Use the printer driver to set resolution to 300 dpi. Help of the printer driver RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions C Turn on Image Memory. Use the printer's System Menu to turn on Image Memory. P.90 System Menu 35

120 Troubleshooting Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel Important If an error message that is not included in the following table appears on the panel display, turn the printer off and on. If this does not clear the error message, write down the error number and the message, and contact your sales or service representative. 4 The panel display can show only one error message at a time. Printing a configuration page shows all current printer errors. P.95 Printing the Configuration Page For more information about the IPDL-C printer driver, see the printer driver's Help. Message Description Comments Add Fuser Oil (on the lower line) Add Fuser Oil (on the upper line) Add Toner xxx Change 120K Change Fuser Change PCU Fuser oil is low. You can print about 30 pages after this message appears. The fuser oil bottle is empty. The toner indicated by xxx runs out. It is time for scheduled maintenance. It is time to replace the fusing unit. It is time to replace the photoconductor unit. Replace the fuser oil bottle. P.72 Replacing the Fuser Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter Replace the fuser oil bottle. P.72 Replacing the Fuser Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter Replace the indicated toner cartridge. P.66 Replacing the Toner Cartridge Contact your sales or service representative. Contact your sales or service representative. If prints are dirty, replace the photoconductor unit. P.68 Replacing the Photoconductor Unit Change Fuser Cleaner. The fuser cleaner is dirty. Replace the fuser cleaner. P.76 Replacing the Fuser Cleaner Change XX It is time to change the unit indicated by XX. Contact your sales or service representative. XX indicates the unit to be replaced as follows: T1: Transfer drum R1: Pick-up roller for the standard tray R2: Pick-up roller for the paper feed unit D1: Paper discharger 36

121 Error & Status Messages Message Description Comments Check Tray2 Connection The paper feed unit (option) is not installed correctly. Install the paper feed unit correctly. the "Setup Guide" that comes with the printer Chg. Cleaner The fuser cleaner is dirty. You can print about 1,000 more pages after this message is displayed. Close Duplex The duplex unit cover is open. Close the duplex unit cover. Uint Cover *1 Close Front Cover The front cover is open. Close the front cover. the "Setup Guide" that comes with the printer Close Rear Cover The rear cover is open. Close the rear cover. Close Top Cover The top cover is open. Close the top cover. Energy Saver In the Energy Saver mode. Press the operation key or send a job from the computer to turn the power on. Load (paper size) Low on: xxx Open and Close Front Cover Open DuplexCover Remove Misfeed *1 There is no paper of the indicated size in the paper tray being used. There is no paper of the correct size loaded in the paper tray. The toner indicated by xxx is low. The front cover is not closed correctly. There is a paper misfed in the duplex unit. Load the indicated paper size into the paper tray being used. P.29 Loading Paper Load the correct size paper. Replace the indicated toner cartridge. The color of the toner is shown by the CMYK color model. The meaning is following. C: cyan M: magenta Y: yellow K: black P.66 Replacing the Toner Cartridge Open the front cover and close it correctly until it is locked into place. Remove the misfed paper. P.59 When the Message "Open DuplexCover Remove Misfeed" Appears 4 37

122 Troubleshooting Message Description Comments 4 Open Rear Cover Remove Misfeed Paper Size Error Paper Type Error Remove Misfeed From Output Tray Remove Misfeed From Paper Tray Reset Cleaner Correctly Reset Fusing Unit Correctly Reset PCU Correctly Reset Paper Tray Correctly Reset Transfer Roller Correctly Reset xxx Toner Correctly Warming Up There is a paper misfeed in the printer. There is a difference between the paper size in the tray and the requested paper size from the computer. There is a difference between the paper type in the tray and the requested paper type from the computer. There is a paper misfeed in the printer. There is a paper misfeed in the printer. The fuser cleaner roller is not installed in the printer. The fusing unit is not installed in the printer. The photoconductor unit is not installed in the printer. The paper tray is not installed correctly. The transfer roller is not installed correctly. The indicated toner cartridge is not installed in the printer. The printer is warming up or processing internally. Remove the misfed paper. P.56 When the Message "Open Rear Cover Remove Misfeed" Appears Check if the correct paper is set P.29 Loading Paper Check if the correct paper is set P.29 Loading Paper Remove the misfed paper. P.57 When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Output Tray" Appears Remove the misfed paper. P.54 When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Paper Tray" Appears Install the fuser cleaner. P.76 Replacing the Fuser Cleaner Contact your sales or service representative. Install the photoconductor unit. P.68 Replacing the Photoconductor Unit Install the paper tray correctly. Contact your sales or service representative. Install the indicated toner cartridge. P.66 Replacing the Toner Cartridge Wait until the printer returns to the ready condition or finishes processing internally. Waste T Full The waste toner bottle is full. Replace the waste toner bottle. P.75 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner is Full The waste toner bottle is full. Replace the waste toner bottle. P.75 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle 38

123 Error & Status Messages A3:Error A6:Error AB:Error B0:Error Message Description Comments There is too much data for the I/O buffer to handle. There is not enough printer memory to print one or more of the pages in the print job. The printer is unable to process the data you are trying to print. An error has occurred in the optional memory unit. Check if the interface cable is inserted into the printer and the computer securely. Check if the interface cable is damaged or broken. Increase the size of the I/O buffer. P.79 Using the Operation Panel See P.114 Low Memory. Install optional memory unit to increase the amount of printer memory. Reduce the amount of data being sent to the printer. Turn the printer off and on. Then, try to print again. Turn off the printer. Remove and reinstall the memory unit and turn on the printer. Then, try to print again. Turn off the printer. Remove the memory unit and turn on the printer. Then, try to print again. In this case, you might not be able print complex print jobs. 4 B1:Error An error has occurred in the standard parallel interface. Contact your sales or service representative. B3:Error The printer setting is wrong. Reset the printer using "Menu Reset" of the "Maintenance" menu. P.79 Using the Operation Panel B5:Error An error has occurred in the RICOH-SCRIPT2 module. Contact your sales or service representative. 39

124 Troubleshooting Message Description Comments 4 B7: Error An error has occurred in the optional Network Interface Board. 85:Error 86:Error 91:Error 94:Error The printer has run out of frame memory. There is not enough memory to render the graphic data. You may be trying to print with the wrong printer driver. You might not be using the correct interface cable. An error has occurred in the printer's standard memory. The amount of the memory is not set correctly. Turn the printer off and on. Then, try to print again. Turn off the printer. Remove and reinstall the Network Interface Board and turn on the printer. Then, try to print again. Turn off the printer. Remove the Network Interface Board from the printer and turn on the printer. Then, try to print again. If you remove the Network Interface Board, you cannot print via the network. You can send the print job to the printer only via a parallel cable connection. Reduce the size of the input buffer, or add optional memory. Confirm that you are using the correct printer driver. Confirm that you are using the correct interface cable. Turn the printer off and on. Then, try to print again. Specify the correct amount of memory using the printer driver. *1 This message appears when the optional duplex unit is installed to the printer. If you cannot solve the problem by taking the above actions, turn the printer off and on. If this does not clear the error message, write down the error number and the message, and contact your sales or service representative. 40

125 Error & Status Messages Getting Printer Information over the Network The optional Network Interface Board is required to acquire printer information over the network. Printer current status You can check the printer's current status using the following method. UNIX Use the lpq command or stat parameter of rsh, rcp, or ftp. mshell Use status command. For more information Operating Instructions of the optional network interface board 4 Call Service Message Description Comments Cleaner : Not Set Correctly Color Toner: Not Set Correctly Duplex Unit Cover Open Energy Save Mode There is a malfunction in the printer. The fuser cleaner roller is not installed in the printer. A toner cartridge is not installed in the printer. The cover of the duplex unit is open. The printer is in Energy Saver mode. Turn the printer off and on. If this does not clear the problem, contact your sales or service representative. Install the fuser cleaner. P.76 Replacing the Fuser Cleaner Install the toner cartridge. P.66 Replacing the Toner Cartridge Close the cover. Wait for a while. Front Cover Open The front cover is open. Close the front cover. the "Setup Guide" that comes with the printer FrontCover:Not Closed Properly Fusing Oil is Low The front cover is not closed correctly. Fuser oil is low. You can print about 30 pages more after this message appears. Open the front cover, and close it again until it locks into place. Replace the fuser oil bottle. P.72 Replacing the Fuser Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter Fusing Oil is Empty The fuser oil bottle is empty. Replace the fuser oil bottle. P.72 Replacing the Fuser Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter 41

126 Troubleshooting Message Description Comments 4 Fusing Unit: Not Set Correctly The fusing unit is not installed in the printer. Contact your sales or service representative. Low on Toner Toner is low. Prepare the toner. Low on xxx Toner The indicated toner is low. Replace the indicated toner cartridge. After this message appears, you can print about 300 pages (A4 5% chart) for C (cyan), M (magenta), or Y (yellow) toner. Printing is disabled when the printer runs out of any one toner color. P.66 Replacing the Toner Cartridge Maintenance Required No Paper Paper Misfeed at Duplex Unit Paper Misfeed at Output Tray Paper Misfeed at Rear Cover Paper Misfeed at Tray Paper Tray : Not Set Correctly Paper Type Error PCU : Not Set Correctly Performing Self Check It is time for periodic maintenance. There is no paper in the paper tray. There is a paper misfed in the duplex unit. There is a paper misfed in the printer. There is a paper misfed in the printer. There is a paper misfed in the printer. The paper tray is not installed correctly. There is a difference between the paper type in the tray and the requested paper type from the computer. The photoconductor unit is not installed in the printer. The printer is running the built-in self check program. Ready Printer works properly. Contact your sales or service representative. Load paper into the paper tray. P.29 Loading Paper Remove the misfed paper. P.59 When the Message "Open DuplexCover Remove Misfeed" Appears Remove the misfed paper. P.57 When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Output Tray" Appears Remove the misfed paper. P.56 When the Message "Open Rear Cover Remove Misfeed" Appears Remove the misfed paper. P.54 When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Paper Tray" Appears Install the paper tray correctly. Check if the correct paper is set. P.29 Loading Paper Install the photoconductor unit correctly. P.68 Replacing the Photoconductor Unit Wait for a while. 42

127 Error & Status Messages Message Description Comments Rear Cover Open The rear cover is open. Close the rear cover. the "Setup Guide" that comes with the printer Time to Change Fuser Cleaner Time to Change Fusing Unit Time to Change PCU Time to Change XX It is time to replace the fuser cleaner. It is time to replace the fusing unit. It is time to replace the photoconductor unit. It is time to replace the unit indicated by XX. Replace the fuser cleaner. P.76 Replacing the Fuser Cleaner Contact your sales or service representative. If printed side gets dirty, replace the photoconductor unit. P.68 Replacing the Photoconductor Unit Contact your sales or service representative. XX indicates the unit to be replaced as follows: T1: Transfer drum R1: Pick-up roller for the standard tray R2: Pick-up roller for the paper feed unit D1: Paper discharger Toner is Empty A toner cartridge runs out. Replace the toner cartridge. P.66 Replacing the Toner Cartridge Top Cover Open The top cover remains open. Close the top cover. TransferRoller:NotSetCorrectly Tray2 : Not Set Correctly Warming Up The transfer roller is not installed correctly. The paper feed unit (option) is not installed correctly. The printer is preparing for printing. Contact your sales or service representative. Install the paper feed unit correctly. the "Setup Guide" that comes with the printer Wait until the printer is warmed up. Waste Toner is Full The waste toner bottle is full. Replace the waste toner bottle. P.75 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle XXX: Not Set Correctly xxx Toner is Empty The indicated toner cartridge is not installed correctly. The indicated toner is low or has run out. Install the indicated toner cartridge correctly. P.66 Replacing the Toner Cartridge Replace the indicated toner cartridge. P.66 Replacing the Toner Cartridge 4 43

128 Troubleshooting Printer configuration You can check the printer's current status using the following method. UNIX Use the info parameter of rsh, rcp, or ftp mshell Use info command. For more information Operating Instructions of the optional network interface 4 * (asterisk) indicates the current setting. Items marked by * are explained in the following tables. Item Description Input Tray No. Name PageSize Status List Output Tray No. Name Status Emulation No. Name Version Program No. Name ID number of the paper tray Name of the paper tray *1 Paper size loaded in the paper tray *2 Current status of the paper tray *3 ID number of the output tray Name of the output tray (Fixed to Standard ) Current status of the output tray (Fixed to Normal ) ID number of the emulation used by the printer Name of the emulation used in the printer *4 Version of the emulation ID number of the program Name of the program (Fixed to blank.) *1 Input Tray: Name Name Description Tray1 Tray2 Standard tray Paper feed unit 44

129 Error & Status Messages *2 Input Tray: PageSize A4R A5R B5R LGR LTR FRE Paper size A4K A5K B5K 8 1 / 2 14"K 8 1 / 2 " 11 K Custom size Description *3 Input Tray: Status Status Normal NoTray PaperEnd *4 Emulation: Name Emulation name RWC(IPDL-C) RPS(RicohScript2) Description There is no paper tray There is no paper in the paper tray Description IPDL-C RICOH-SCRIPT2 4 45

130 Troubleshooting Printer Does Not Print 4 Possible cause Is the power on? Does the On Line indicator stay on? Does the Error indicator stay red? Is the paper loaded? Is the interface cable between the printer and the computer connected securely? Are you using a correct interface cable? Did you connect the interface cable after turning on the power switch? When you print using the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver in a network, data is received by the printer, but is not printed. Solutions If not, confirm that the power cord is securely plugged into the power outlet and the printer. Turn on the printer. the "Setup Guide" that comes with the printer If not, press {On Line} to make it light up. If so, check the error message on the panel display and take the required action. P.36 Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel Load paper into the paper tray. P.29 Loading Paper Connect the interface cable properly. If there are any connectors or screws, confirm that they are fastened securely. For more information about the settings, see the "Quick Installation Guide". The type of interface cable you should use depends on the computer. Be sure to use the correct one. If the cable is damaged or worn, replace it with a new one. For more information about the settings, see the "Quick Installation Guide". Connect the interface cable before turning on the power switch. Windows 95/98/Me On the [PostScript] tab of the Printer Properties, click [Advanced] and then clear both [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job]. Windows 2000 On the [Device Settings] tab of the Printer Properties, select [No] for both [Send CTRL-D Before Each Job:] and [Send CTRL-D After Each Job:]. Windows NT 4.0 Open the [Advanced] tab of the Printer Properties. From [Post- Script Options], select [No] for both [Send CTRL-D Before Each job:] and [Send CTRL-D After Each job:]. 46

131 Printer Does Not Print Possible cause If you print using the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver, printing does not start or is interrupted. Solutions Windows 95/98/Me Set a longer [Job timeout:] period with the [PostScript] tab of the Printer Properties. Windows 2000 Set a longer [Job Timeout:] period with the [Device Settings] tab of the Printer Properties. Windows NT 4.0 Set a longer [Job Timeout:] period with the [Device Settings] tab of the Printer Properties. Macintosh Set a longer [Job Timeout] period. A PostScript error might occur if there is not enough memory in the machine, or there are errors in the print data sent to the machine. Print the configuration page to check the amount of available memory. If the memory size is full, increasing the memory may solve this problem. If you still cannot clear the problem, contact your sales or service representative. The print job might be reset. Do the following. Confirm that you have selected the correct printer driver. Try printing again. Set a longer Wait Timeout. 4 Windows 95/98/Me Set a longer [Wait timeout:] period with the [PostScript] tab of the Printer Properties. Windows 2000 Set a longer [Wait Timeout:] period with the [Device Settings] tab of the Printer Properties. Windows NT 4.0 Set a longer [Wait Timeout:] period with the [Device Settings] tab of the Printer Properties. Macintosh You can specify a longer "I/O Timeout" period on the operation panel. P.79 Using the Operation Panel 47

132 Troubleshooting Possible cause Is the Data In indicator blinking or lit after starting the print job? Solutions If the Data In indicator stays off, data is not being sent to the printer or the printer may be resetting the print job because there was a long delay in receiving the data from the computer. 4 Do you print via a network? Can you print a test page (configuration page)? If the printer is using "I/O Timeout" Increase the value of the "I/O Timeout" setting of the "IPDL-C Menu" or "RPS2 Menu". Or set the "I/O Timeout" value to "0" (this is the off setting). P.79 Using the Operation Panel If the printer is connected to the computer using the parallel cable Confirm that the printer port settings are correct. For a parallel port connection, port LPT1 or LPT2 should be set. For more information about the printer port settings, see the notes after this table. Network connection Contact your network administrator. If the Data In indicator is blinking or lit. The printer may be resetting the print job. Take the following steps to correct the situation. Increase the "Job Timeout" setting of the "IPDL-C Menu" or "RPS2 Menu". Confirm that the printer driver settings are correct. Change the "Transfer" setting in the "System Menu". Confirm that the "Parallel" setting in "System Menu" is correct. Confirm that the "Ethernet" setting is correct from the operation panel. P.84 Menu Table The setting governs the data transfer speed used by the Network Interface Board. Three options are available: Auto (default) 100 Mbps 10 Mbps For details about the appropriate setting to use on your network, contact your network administrator. If you cannot print a test page, it probably indicates printer malfunction. You should contact your sales or service representative. If you can print a test page but cannot get the printer to print when you issue a print command from the computer, it probably means there is a problem with the computer. Also keep it in mind that large, complex data might take a long time for the printer to process. If you cannot solve the problem by taking the above actions, contact your sales or service representative. 48

133 Printer Does Not Print Windows 95/98/Me A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Click the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Details] tab. D Check the [Print to the following port:] list to confirm that the correct port is selected. Windows 2000 A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Click the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Ports] tab. D Confirm that the correct port is selected. Windows NT 4.0 A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Click the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Port] tab. D Confirm that the correct port is selected. Macintosh A Click [Apple Menu], point to [Control Panel] and then click [Apple Talk]. B In the [connect via.] list box, select [Ethernet]. 4 49

134 Troubleshooting Other Printing Problems For more information about the IPDL-C printer driver, see the printer driver's Help. For more information about the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver, see the Operating Instructions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD- ROM. 4 Status The printer prints a message indicating insufficient memory. Image is printed on the reverse side of paper. Paper misfeeds occur frequently. Possible causes, Descriptions, and Solutions This message is printed when the printer does not have enough memory to print a page. The following are the actions you should take when you encounter memory shortage problems. If these actions do not solve the problem individually, try them in combination with each other. P.114 Low Memory A Increase printer memory. Install the optional memory unit to increase the amount of printer memory. B Reduce resolution. Use the printer driver to set resolution to 300dpi. Help of the printer driver RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions C Turn on Image Memory. Use the printer's System Menu to turn on Image Memory. P.90 System Menu Paper in the paper tray is upside down. Load paper with the print side up. Make sure you are removing misfed paper correctly. Pull the misfed paper out of the printer and double-check to make sure you are removing all the paper that was misfed. P.54 Removing Misfed Paper Check if the paper tray is set correctly. If not, set it correctly. P.29 Loading Paper Paper is not loaded correctly in the paper tray. Remove the paper from the tray and reload it correctly. P.29 Loading Paper Check the paper type settings. The type of paper set with the printer driver might be different from the actual paper or media type. Make the correct paper or media type setting. You might be using paper not supported by this printer. Use the appropriate type of paper. P.24 Paper Recommendations 50

135 Other Printing Problems Status It takes too much time to start printing. It takes too much time to complete the print job. It takes too much time to perform black and white printing. The desired tray is not used for the output. The desired paper size is not used for the output. The print side gets dirty. Possible causes, Descriptions, and Solutions The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process. If the Data In indicator is blinking, the data processing is being done. Just wait until it resumes. The Energy Saver mode might be enabled. In the Energy Saver mode, it takes time for the printer to warm up. Photographs and other data intensive pages take a long time for the printer to process, so simply wait when printing such data. Changing the following settings may help to speed up printing. IPDL-C printer driver Set [Printing Mode] to [Fast]. Set [Resolution:] to [600 dpi / Fast]. RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver Set [Gradation] to [Fast]. The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process it. If the Data In indicator is blinking, the data processing is being done. Just wait until it resumes. If "Warming Up" appears on the panel display, the printer is now warming up. Wait for a while. [Color] is selected on the printer driver. Change the color mode setting to [Black & White]. Some applications ignore the color mode setting made with the printer driver. The printer driver setting is not correct. Change the setting. The printer driver setting is not correct. Change the setting. Specified paper is not loaded correctly in the paper tray. Remove the paper from the tray and reload the specified paper correctly. P.29 Loading Paper Adjust the image density setting. Extreme settings may create output that appears dirty. P.63 Adjusting the Image Density If the message "Change PCU" appears on the panel display, replace the photoconductor unit. P.68 Replacing the Photoconductor Unit 4 51

136 Troubleshooting 4 Status Image density is too light. Part of the printout is blurred or light. The printout is different from the specified color. Toner is not fused well when printing on thick paper or OHP transparencies. The color of the printout is different from the color on the computer's display. The printout is different from the image on the computer screen. Possible causes, Descriptions, and Solutions Turning on [Toner Saving] can cause blurring or fine lines not to be printed. With color printing, toner saving can cause abnormal coloring. Try printing again after turning [Toner Saving] off. If the message "Low on: xxx" or "Add Toner xxx" is on the panel display, replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color. P.66 Replacing the Toner Cartridge You might be using paper not supported by this printer. Use the appropriate type of paper. P.21 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Make the image density darker. P.63 Adjusting the Image Density If the message "Low on: xxx" or "Add Toner xxx" is on the panel display, replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color. P.66 Replacing the Toner Cartridge Check if toner cartridges and the photoconductor unit are set correctly. If not, set them correctly. You might be using paper not supported by this printer. Use the appropriate type of paper. P.21 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Check if the surface where the printer is located is level, and not angled in anyway. Check if a specific color is missing. If so, replace the toner cartridge of the missing color. The printer driver setting is not correct. Select [Thick Paper], or [OHP Transparency] in the paper type setting with the printer driver. The toner based color system used by the printer is different from the light based color system of the computer screen. Turning on [Toner Saving] can cause color irregularities. Check the settings on the [Color Setting] tab and restore the default settings. Certain applications or image creation methods produce images that cannot be printed exactly as they appear on the computer screen. With the IPDL-C printer driver, checking the [Print as Bitmap] item on the [Setup] tab causes the print data to be converted to image data before it is sent to the printer. This produces a printout closest to that displayed on the computer screen. This setting also causes large-volume print jobs to take longer to print because of the required conversion process. 52

137 Other Printing Problems Status Changing the color settings with the printer driver causes a drastic change in printout color. Photograph printing looks rough. Color documents are printed in black and white. Fine dot pattern does not print. Solid areas, lines or text are shiny or glossy when created as a mixture of cyan, magenta, yellow. Black gradation is not natural. Thin lines are blurred or light. Overlay printing cannot be performed. The page layout has changed. Possible causes, Descriptions, and Solutions With the IPDL-C printer driver, do not make radical changes to the settings on the [Color Setting] tab. Also note that the sample shown by the printer driver is intended to show what processes are being applied, not exactly what your printout will look like. With the IPDL-C printer driver, select [High Quality] on the [Print Quality] tab. Printing from some applications results in a loss of resolution. The printer driver is not set up for color printing. Select [Color] in the color mode setting with the printer driver. Some applications normally print color text as black and white. Select [Photograph] in the [Dithering:] setting with the printer driver. Select [K] in the [Black Text/Graphics:] setting with the printer driver. Select [CMY + K] in the [Black Text/Graphics:] setting with the printer driver. With the IPDL-C printer driver, select the [CAD] check box on the [Print Quality] tab. The printing conditions for the document to be printed differ from those for the page to be overlaid. The printing conditions including paper size, color setting and quality setting for the page to be overlaid and for the document to be printed should be the same. Some applications ignore the overlay printing mode made with the printer driver. The printable area differs from printer to printer. A document that when printed by another printer fits on a single page might not fit on one page when printed by this printer. From the IPDL-C printer driver, check the [Enlarge Printable Area] on the [MISC.] tab. 4 If you cannot solve the problem by taking the above actions, contact your sales or service representative. 53

138 Troubleshooting Removing Misfed Paper 4 When a paper misfeed occurs, an error message appears on the panel display. The procedure you should follow to remove misfed paper depends on the location of the misfeed indicated on the panel display. R CAUTION: When accessing the inside of the machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified in this manual. If you do, it might result in receiving a burn or injury. The paper tray does not have a stopper. When pulling it out, be careful not to pull it strongly. If you do, the tray might fall and cause a personal injury. Important Toner printed on misfed paper is not fused and can make your hands or clothing dirty. Take care to avoid contact with the toner as you remove misfed paper. Check the following points if paper continues to misfeed. Confirm that paper is properly loaded in the paper tray. Confirm that the number of sheets does not exceed the maximum amount for the tray. Confirm that the paper in the tray matches the size for which the tray is set up. Confirm that misfed paper is still not inside the printer when you resume printing. If a paper misfeed still occurs, contact your sales or service representative. Do not touch the photoconductor unit when removing misfed paper. If you do, the photoconductor unit might be damaged. When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Paper Tray" Appears A Pull out the paper tray. ZDGY010J If your printer has an optional paper feed unit installed, check all paper trays for misfeeds. B Carefully pull the misfed paper. Make sure that you do not leave any misfed paper in the printer. ZDGY090J 54

139 Removing Misfed Paper C Slide the paper tray completely into the printer. Important Be sure to insert the paper tray completely. If not fully inserted, misfeeds might occur, or the front cover might touch the paper tray. When you cannot find the misfeed near the tray A If you cannot remove the misfed paper in step B, open the rear cover of the printer. If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), first open the cover of the duplex unit (a), then open the paper guide unit inside the duplex unit (b), and finally open the rear cover of the printer (c). (c) 4 (b) (a) ZDGY100J ZDGY130J B Check for misfed paper. If you find paper, carefully pull it. Make sure not to leave any paper inside the printer. C Close the rear cover. ZDGY110J If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), close the paper guide unit and the cover of the duplex unit. 55

140 Troubleshooting 4 When the Message "Open Rear Cover Remove Misfeed" Appears Important Toner printed on misfed paper is not fused and can make your hands or clothing dirty. Take care to avoid contact with the toner as you remove misfed paper. A Open the rear cover of the printer. If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), first open the cover of the duplex unit (a), then open the paper guide unit inside the duplex unit (b), and finally open the rear cover of the printer (c). B If the paper has not entered the fusing unit, carefully pull it out. ZDGY110J C If the paper is inside the fusing unit, open the top cover. (c) (b) (a) ZDGY130J ZDGH100J If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), first open the upper portion of the duplex unit, and then open the top cover of the printer. 56 ZDGP450J

141 Removing Misfed Paper D Push the pressure release levers as illustrated to release the pressure between the rollers. ZDGY120J E Carefully pull the misfed paper from the rear cover side. When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Output Tray" Appears Important Toner printed on misfed paper is not fused and can make your hands or clothing dirty. Take care to avoid contact with the toner as you remove misfed paper. A Open the rear cover of the printer. If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), first open the cover of the duplex unit (a), then open the paper guide unit inside the duplex unit (b), and finally open the rear cover of the printer (c). 4 ZDGY111J F Return the pressure release levers to their original positions. G Close the top cover and rear cover, and press the center of the top cover until it locks securely into place. If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), close the paper guide unit, cover and upper portion of the duplex unit. (c) (b) (a) ZDGY130J 57

142 Troubleshooting B Open the top cover, and then push the pressure release levers as illustrated to release the pressure between the rollers. C Carefully pull the misfed paper from the rear cover side. ZDGY111J 4 ZDGY120J If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), first open the upper portion of the duplex unit, and then open the top cover of the printer. D Return the pressure release levers to their original positions. E Close the top cover and rear cover, and press the center of the top cover until it locks securely into place. If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), close the paper guide unit, cover and upper portion of the duplex unit. ZDGP450J 58

143 Removing Misfed Paper When the Message "Open DuplexCover Remove Misfeed" Appears C If you find the misfed paper as shown in the illustration, carefully pull it out. A Use the inset grips to open the upper portion of the duplex unit. ZDGY170J D Open the cover as shown in the illustration, and if you find the misfed paper, carefully pull it out. 4 ZDGP450J B If you find the misfed paper as shown in the illustration, carefully pull it out. ZDGY180J E Close the upper portion of the duplex unit. F Open the cover of the duplex unit. ZDGY160J ZDGY190J 59

144 Troubleshooting G If you find the misfed paper as shown in the illustration, carefully pull it out. I Lift up the cover of the paper guide unit by using the lever, and carefully pull the misfed paper out. 4 ZDGY220J H Open the paper guide unit inside the duplex unit. ZDGY210J J Close the paper guide unit and the cover of the duplex unit. ZDGY200J 60

145 Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer Cleaning the Charge Wire The charge wire requires cleaning when printouts appear dirty. R CAUTION: When accessing the inside of the machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified in this manual. If you do, it might result in receiving a burn or injury. Do not open the front cover when the paper tray is pulled out halfway. If you do, it might cause a personal injury. A Press the printer's power switch to turn off the power. B Open the front cover and the top cover. C Raise the green lock levers to a vertical position. ZDGH120J D Hold the inset grip of the photoconductor unit, pull it straight up, and remove it from the printer. 4 ZDGH130J ZDGH110J Important Exposing the photoconductor unit to light for too long can reduce its performance. Clean the charge wire as quickly as possible. If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), first open the upper portion of the duplex unit, and then open the top cover of the printer. 61

146 Troubleshooting E Move the wire cleaner left and right several times to clean off the charge wire. G Return the green lock levers to their original positions. ZDGH150J 4 ZDHH040E Important After cleaning is finished, return the wire cleaner to its original position. F Insert the photoconductor unit so that the protruding axles on both sides are aligned with the tracks inside the green lock levers. Lower it until the gears mesh securely. ZDGH140J Important When inserting the photoconductor unit, be careful not to damage the surface of it. Important Do not return the lock levers forcibly. If you cannot lock them easily, pull the photoconductor unit from the printer. Then reinsert it until the gears mesh securely. After that, try returning the levers to their original positions. H Close the top cover and front cover. Press the center of the top cover and center cover until they lock into place. If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), close the upper portion of the duplex unit. I Press the power switch to turn on the printer power. 62

147 Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer Adjusting the Image Density Changing the image density setting might cause a deterioration of color balance. We recommend that you normally leave the image density at its factory default setting. The following procedure describes how to change the magenta image density. You can use the same procedure to change the image density for the other toner colors as well. Important Extreme settings may create output that appears dirty. Image density settings should be made from the application or the printer driver whenever possible. A Turn on the printer's power switch. B Press {Menu}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Media Escape The following message appears on the panel display. Enter <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l ZDHS031E C Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> Maintenance j l The following message appears on the panel display. <Maintenance> j 1.Toner Level l D After confirming that 1. Toner Level is on the display, press {#Enter.} The following message appears on the panel display. <Toner Level> j Cyan l E Press {T} or {U} to display "Magenta", and then press {#Enter}. The following message appears on the panel display. <Magenta> jl/# -<-----g----->+ F Press {U} or {T} to adjust the toner density, and then press {#Enter}. The "Toner Level" menu appears. To make the image density darker, press {U} to move the g symbol to the right. To make it lighter, press {T} to move the g symbol to the left. G Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display. 4 63

148 Troubleshooting 4 Adjusting the Setting of Registration of the Paper Tray Adjusting the registration refers to changing the position of the printed image on paper fed from the optional tray so it matches that of the standard tray. Probably you will never need to perform this procedure. Use A4 or 8 1 / 2 11 paper to print the configuration page. A Turn on the printer's power switch. B Press {Menu}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Media Escape Enter E Press {#Enter} again. This prints the configuration page. Important If printing does not start, check the panel display for any error messages and take the action required to correct the problem. P.36 Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel F After confirming that "1.Config.Page" is displayed, press {Escape}. The following the message appears on the panel display. <Menu> List Print j l G You can find the crop marks on the long edge of the configuration page. Check if the left and right margins on the long edge of the configuration page are as shown in the illustration. ZDHS031E The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l C Press {T} or {U} to display "List Print", and then press {#Enter}. The following message appears on the panel display. <List Print> j 1.Config.Page l D After confirming that "1.Config.Page" is displayed, press {#Enter}. H If the left and right margins are not the same, press {U} or {T} to display "Maintenance", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> Maintenance j l The following message appears on the panel display. <Maintenance> j 1.Toner Level l 64

149 Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer I Press {T} or {U} to display "4.Registration", and then press {#Enter}. N Press {On Line}. The Ready message appears on the panel display. <Maintenance> j 4.Registrationl The following message appears on the panel display. <Registration> j Tray2:Horiz. l J Press {T} or {U} to display the name of the tray whose margins you want to match, and then press {#Enter}. The following message appears on the panel display. 4 <Tray2:Horiz.> jl/# 0 K Press {U} or {T} to match the margins, and then press {#Enter}. When the value is increased by one, the image moves 0.5mm to the right. The setting can be changed from -7 to 7. L Press {#Enter}. <Config.Page> Press # key This prints the configuration page with the new setting and returns to the Registration menu. M Confirm of the registration. If you want to change the setting, press {#Enter} and repeat stepsk and L. If you want to finish, go to step N. 65

150 Troubleshooting Replacing Consumables 4 Replacing the Toner Cartridge Replace a toner cartridge whenever the following messages appear on the panel display. IPDL-C Low on:xxx Add Toner xxx Toner color is indicated by XXX. R WARNING: Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites. If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to your local regulations. R CAUTION: When accessing the inside of the machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified in this manual. If you do, it might result in receiving a burn or injury. Do not open the front cover when the paper tray is pulled out halfway. If you do, it might cause a personal injury. Important Pull the toner cartridge out slowly and carefully to prevent spilling of toner. When several toner colors run out at the same time, a message appears on the operation panel. Replace them in the following order: A Black B Yellow C Cyan D Magenta Store toner cartridges under the conditions below: Temperature: 10 C to 32.5 C (50 F to 90.5 F) Humidity: 20% to 80% RH (no condensation) When handling toner cartridges, never stand them up on either end or position them upside down. A Open the front cover by pulling the front cover open lever. ZDGH160J 66

151 Replacing Consumables B Carefully pull out the toner cartridge for the color indicated on the panel display. D Remove the tape from the new toner cartridge and remove the protective cover. ZDGT010J Important Pull the toner cartridge out slowly and carefully to prevent spilling of toner. Place the old toner cartridge on paper or some other material to avoid making the area you are working dirty with toner. C Hold the new toner cartridge and shake it well, about 3 to 4 times, as shown in the illustration. ZDGT201J Important Once the protective cover is removed, toner can spill from the cartridge easily. Take care to avoid subjecting the toner cartridge to vibration and impact after removing the protective cover. E Slowly and carefully slide the new toner cartridge into the printer. 4 ZDGT020J ZDGT200J Important Do not push the toner cartridge with force. If you do, the printer might be damaged. If it sticks, pull it out and try again. 67

152 Troubleshooting 4 F Close the front cover. Press the center of the cover until it locks securely into place. The Add Toner message clears from the panel display and the printer starts warming up. Replacing the Photoconductor Unit The message shown below indicates that the photoconductor unit is approaching the end of its life. IPDL-C Change PCU ZDGH012J You can still continue to use the current photoconductor unit if you are satisfied with the quality of the output being produced by the printer. When the printed image starts looking soiled (horizontal lines along the edges of the page, for example), replace the photoconductor unit as soon as possible. R WARNING: Do not incinerate the photoconductor unit. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites. If you dispose the used photoconductor unit yourself, dispose of it according to your local regulations. R CAUTION: When accessing the inside of the machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified in this manual. If you do, it might result in receiving a burn or injury. Do not open the front cover when the paper tray is pulled out halfway. If you do, it might cause a personal injury. Important Exposing the photoconductor unit to light for too long can reduce its performance. Replace the unit as quickly as possible. Do not touch the surface of the photoconductor unit. If you do, it may damage the photoconductor unit and reduce the print quality. Do not expose the photoconductor unit to a light source greater than 800 luxes for more than two minutes. If you do, the photoconductor unit will be damaged and the print quality might be reduced. 68

153 Replacing Consumables Before removing the photoconductor unit from the printer, spread paper or some other material around the area you are working to keep the toner from making the floor dirty. The Change PCU message is based on a printed page counter kept internally by the printer. It is meant as a general guide to photoconductor unit life only. Actual photoconductor unit life depends on the printing conditions. A Make sure that the Data In indicator is not lit or flashing, and then press the printer's power switch to turn off the power. B Open the front cover by pulling the front cover open lever and open the top cover by pulling the top cover open lever. If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), first open the upper portion of the duplex unit, and then open the top cover of the printer. C Stand up the green lock levers to a vertical position. ZDGH120J D Hold the inset grip of the photoconductor unit, pull it straight up, and remove it from the printer. 4 ZDGH130J ZDGH110J Important Be sure to open both the top and front covers before removing the photoconductor unit. Failure to do so can result in damage to the surface of the photoconductor unit. E Remove the new photoconductor unit from the box. 69

154 Troubleshooting F Remove the left and right pins from the new photoconductor unit. H Insert the new photoconductor unit so that the green axles on both sides are aligned with the tracks inside the green lock levers. Lower it until the gears mesh securely. 4 ZDGH610J G Remove the protective sheet from the new photoconductor unit. ZDGH140J Important When inserting the photoconductor unit, be careful not to damage the surface of it. I Return the green lock levers to their original positions. ZDGH611J The white powder on the photoconductor unit is to protect it after installation into the printer. This white powder does not have any adverse effect on the interior of the printer. ZDGH150J Important Do not return lock levers with force. If you cannot lock them easily, pull the photoconductor unit from the printer. Then insert it again until the gears mesh securely. After that, try returning the levers to their original positions. 70

155 Replacing Consumables J Close the top cover and front cover. Press the center of the top cover and front cover until they lock into place. M Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {#Enter}. The Maintenance menu appears. <Maintenance> j 1. Toner Level l N Press {T} or {U} to display "2. Reinstall", and then press {#Enter}. <Reinstall> j Fuser Cleaner l 4 ZDGH111J If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), close the upper portion of the duplex unit. K Press the power switch to turn on the power. L Press {Menu}. O Press {T} or {U} to display "PCU", and then press {#Enter}. <PCU> Press # key P Press {#Enter}. This performs the reinstall operation and the Maintenance menu returns. Q Press {On Line}. The normal display screen appears. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS031E The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l 71

156 Troubleshooting Replacing the Fuser Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter A Slide the top cover open lever towards the front of the printer, and open the top cover. 4 Replace the oil bottle and ozone filter whenever the following messages appear on the panel display. IPDL-C Add FuserOil Add Fuser Oil The Fuser Oil Type204 includes a fuser oil bottle and ozone filter. R WARNING: Do not incinerate the oil bottle. This action could cause a fire or getting burned. Spilt oil is very slippery. If oil is spilt, wipe it with alkaline cleaner. Otherwise, the oily surfaces can create the danger of slipping and personal injury. R CAUTION: When accessing the inside of the machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified in this manual. If you do, it might result in receiving a burn or injury. Important Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites. Dispose of used ozone filters as general burnable refuse. ZDGH100J If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), first open the upper portion of the duplex unit, and then open the top cover of the printer. B Rotate the lock levers to release the bottle, and then remove the oil bottle from the printer. ZDGH170J 72

157 Replacing Consumables C Insert the new oil bottle into the printer. When inserting, the side with the label should be facing towards you, and the mouth of the bottle facing down. Rotate the lock levers back to their original positions to lock the bottle in place. F Remove the ozone filter from inside the ventilator cover. ZDGH190J G Install a new ozone filter on the ventilator cover. 4 ZDGH171J D Close the top cover. Press the center of the top cover until it locks into place. If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), close the upper portion of the duplex unit. E Remove the ventilator cover. ZDGH191J H Replace the ventilator cover onto the printer. ZDGH181J ZDGH180J 73

158 Troubleshooting Prior to moving and transporting the printer Before moving and transporting the printer, be sure to remove the fuser oil bottle, and then remove and wipe out any residual oil from the printer. A Slide the top cover open lever towards the front of the printer, and open the top cover. C Remove the oil bottle while placing a sheet of paper under the bottle so that no oil falls into the printer. 4 ZDHH210J D Put the oil bottle into an oil-proof container, such as a plastic bag. E Remove any excess oil from the printer using the eye-dropper. ZDGH100J B Rotate the lock levers to release the bottle. ZDHH220E Dispose of the oil according to local regulations. ZDHH200E 74

159 Replacing Consumables F Stuff some clean, wadded paper towels into the space where the oil bottle was installed so that any residual oil is absorbed. G Close the top cover. Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle Replace the waste toner bottle whenever the following messages appear on the panel display. IPDL-C Waste T Full Waste Toner is Full ZDHH230E R WARNING: Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites. If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to your local regulations. R CAUTION: When accessing the inside of the machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified in this manual. If you do, it might result in receiving a burn or injury. Do not open the front cover when the paper tray is pulled out halfway. If you do, it might cause a personal injury. Important Waste toner bottles are consumable items and cannot be reused. We recommend that you purchase extra waste toner bottles and keep them on hand for replacement when necessary. Before removing the waste toner bottle from the printer, spread paper or some other material around the area you are working to keep the toner from making the floor dirty. A Turn off the printer's power switch. B Open the front cover by pulling the front cover open lever. ZDGH160J 4 75

160 Troubleshooting C Angling the waste toner bottle as shown in the illustration, pull it out of waste toner bottle holder. G Turn on the printer's power switch. Replacing the Fuser Cleaner 4 ZDGH200J D Remove the sticker from the side of the new waste toner bottle and use it to seal the old waste toner bottle. Replace the fuser cleaner whenever the following message appears on the panel display. IPDL-C Chg. Cleaner Change Fuser Cleaner R CAUTION: When accessing the inside of the machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified in this manual. If you do, it might result in receiving a burn or injury. A Slide the top cover open lever towards the front of the printer, and open the top cover. ZDGH210J E Insert the new waste toner bottle into the waste toner bottle holder, and return the holder to its original position. ZDGH100J ZDGH201J F Close the front cover. Press the center of the front cover until it locks into place. If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), first open the upper portion of the duplex unit, and then open the top cover of the printer. 76

161 Replacing Consumables B Rotate the lock levers to release the lock. ZDGH220J F Close the top cover. Press the center of the top cover until it locks into place. If the printer is equipped with the paper feed unit (optional) and the duplex unit (optional), close the upper portion of the duplex unit. G Press {Menu}. C Grasping the fuser cleaner by its tab, remove it from the printer. 4 Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS031E ZDGH230J D With its roller facing toward you, install a new fuser cleaner into the printer. The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l H Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {#Enter}. The Maintenance menu appears. <Maintenance> j 1. Toner Level l ZDGH231J E While pressing down on the fuser cleaner, turn the lock levers to their original positions. I Press {T} or {U} to display "2. Reinstall", and then press {#Enter}. <Reinstall> j Fuser Cleaner l 77

162 Troubleshooting J After confirming that Fuser Cleaner is on the display, press {#Enter}. The fuser cleaner reinstall screen appears. <Fuser Cleaner> Press # key 4 K Press {#Enter}. This performs the reinstall operation and returns to the Maintenance menu. L Press {On Line}. The normal display screen appears. 78

163 5. Using the Operation Panel Though the factory default settings of the printer are suitable for most printing jobs, the printer menu gives you access to a number of settings that control basic printer operations. The printer menu settings you make are retained even when you turn off the printer. This section provides the following printer menu information. Setting Menus Describes the basic procedures for changing the printer menu settings. Protecting the Menus Describes how to protect the System Menu settings against accidental changes. Menu Table A table chart that shows all of the printer menu items. Menu Settings Provides short explanations of each printer menu setting and what it does. Setting Menus The following procedure describes how to change the I/O buffer size setting. A Press {Menu}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS031E The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l 79

164 Using the Operation Panel B Press {T} or {U} to display the screen for the setting you want to change, and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> System Menu The following message appears on the panel display. j l <System Menu> j 1.Paper Tray l C Press {T} or {U} to display the screen for the menu item you want to change, and then press {#Enter}. 5 <System Menu> j 2.I/O Buffer l An asterisk ( * ) is indicated at the left side of the currently selected item. <I/O Buffer> *128KB j l D Press {T} or {U} to display the screen for the setting you want to change, and then press {#Enter}. <I/O Buffer> 1024KB This registers the setting. E Repeat steps C and D to change other settings. F Press {On Line}. The following message appears on the panel display. Take Offline Then Press Reset j l G Press {On Line}. The On Line indicator stays off and the printer enters offline. H Press {Reset}. This restarts the printer with the new settings. 80 You can check the current menu settings by printing a configuration page. P.95 Printing the Configuration Page

165 Protecting the Menus Protecting the Menus This section describes how to protect the System Menu settings against accidental changes. It makes it impossible to change the System Menu settings you make with the normal procedure unless you perform the required key operation. In a network environment, protecting settings restricts changes to the System Menu settings to network administrators. Protecting the Menus A Check if the On Line indicator stays on. If not, press {On Line}. B Press {#Enter}, then {Escape}, and then {Menu}. 5 Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS041E The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l C Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> Maintenance The following message appears on the panel display. j l <Maintenance> j 1.Toner Level l 81

166 Using the Operation Panel D Press {T} or {U} to display "5.Menu Protect", and then press {#Enter}. <Maintenance> j 5.Menu Protectl The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu Protect> j Off l E Press {T} or {U} to display "On", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu Protect> j On l 5 This registers the setting and the Maintenance menu appears. F Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display. Removing Protection A Check if the On Line indicator stays on. If not, press {On Line}. B Press {#Enter}, then {Escape}, and then {Menu}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS041E The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l 82

167 Protecting the Menus C Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> Maintenance The following message appears on the panel display. j l <Maintenance> j 1.Toner Level l D Press {T} or {U} to display "5.Menu Protect", and then press {#Enter}. <Maintenance> j 5.Menu Protectl The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu Protect> j On l 5 E Press {T} or {U} to display "Off", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu Protect> j Off l This turns off protection and returns to the Maintenance menu. F Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display. 83

168 Using the Operation Panel Menu Table 5 IPDL-C Menu RPS2 Menu System Menu 1. Job Timeout 2. I/O Timeout 1. Resolution 2. Color Mode 3. Color Set 4. ColorProfile 5. Toner Saving 6. Dithering 7. Paper Type 8. Auto Tray SW 9. Duplex Print A.Duplex Bind C. Job Timeout D. I/O Timeout E. Feed Timeout F. Print Errors G. KTalk Mode *1 H. Parallel IF 1. Paper Tray 2. I/O Buffer 3. Energy Level 4. Energy Saver 5. Transfer 6. Image Memory 7. Parallel 8. Bi-direction 9. PrinterLang. 10. Language 32. IP Address *4 33. Subnet Mask *4 34. Gateway Add *4 35. Access CTL. *4 36. Access Mask *4 37. Net Boot *4 38. Frame NW *4 39. Active PTL. *4 84

169 Menu Table Maintenance List Print Select PDL 1. Toner Level P.63 Adjusting the Image Density 2. Reinstall P.68 Replacing the Photoconductor Unit 3. Menu Reset P.100 Resetting Menus 4. Registration P.64 Adjusting the Setting of Registration of the Paper Tray 5. Menu Protect *2 P.81 Protecting the Menus 6. Log Protect *2 P.105 Protecting the User Code Record 7. Log Clear *3 P.106 Deleting the User Code Record 8.Ethernet *2 *4 P.93 Maintenance Menu 9. Prt.Priority P.93 Maintenance Menu 1. Config.Page P.95 Printing the Configuration Page 2. Color Sample P.98 Printing the Color Sample 3. Job Log 4. Statistics *1 The setting is not effective. *2 This menu appears when {#Enter}, {Escape} and {Menu} are pressed while the printer is online. *3 If Log Protect is set to On, this menu will not appear. *4 Available only when the optional Network Interface Board is installed in the printer. 5 85

170 Using the Operation Panel Menu Settings IPDL-C Menu The following are the settings you can make with IPDL-C Menu. Italicized settings indicate default settings Job Timeout You can set how many seconds the printer waits before terminating a print job when the printer does not receive the end of the print job. Setting 000 Off turns off job timeout. 000 Off 1 to 999 seconds by 1 2. I/O Timeout You can set how many seconds the printer waits for more print data before ending its waiting period and terminating a job. Setting 000 Off turns off I/ O timeout. 000 Off 1 to 999 seconds by 1 (999 seconds) RPS2 Menu The following are the settings you can make with RPS2 Menu. The settings made with the printer driver normally take priority, except when a printer driver setting is set to use the printer's settings. Italicized settings indicate default settings. 1.Resolution You can select the resolution and the number of colors used per dot. 600 dpi, 1 bit The printer prints in 600 dpi, with two-valued dots. 600 dpi, 2 bit The printer prints in 600 dpi, with multi-valued dots. 300 dpi, 1 bit The printer prints in 300 dpi, with two-valued dots Color Mode You can select either monochrome or color printing. Color Black & White

171 Menu Settings 3.Color Set (Color Setting) You can select the correction method used for converting the RGB data to CMYK data. Off No modification to the color setting. Vivid Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion with enhanced saturation and brightness to print vivid colors. Super Vivid Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion. The colors printed with this setting are more vivid than those printed with the "Vivid" setting. All of the colors in the image, especially the lighter ones, are emphasized. Fine Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in color rendering dictionaries, and perform CMYK conversion. It makes it possible to print colors that are close to the displayed colors on the computer screen. The color rendering dictionaries refer to the contents selected by Color- Profile. This setting is useful when the application and printer driver do not support the color matching features. 5 The color rendering dictionary that is selected on ColorProfile is used. Super Fine Like the "Fine" setting, the color rendering dictionary is used, however, output is more vivid. This setting is enabled to make light colors print more vivid. 4.ColorProfile You can select the color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to for color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The CRD you select is also referred to when Fine or Super Fine is selected for Color Set. When selecting OHP as the paper type, the CRD automatically adjusts to use a color profile specifically for OHP. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHP, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated on any of the dialog boxes. In this case, this setting is not enabled. Photograph Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones. Presentation Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of documents that contain text and graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and so on. If you use this CRD for printing photographs, color gradations might not be reproduced well. Solid Color Use this setting to print specific colors, logos and so on. 87

172 Using the Operation Panel 5.Toner Saving You can select whether Toner Saving is available or not. Off On Turning on toner saving can cause the output to become blurred and result in very thin lines not printing at all. In the case of color printing, toner saving can cause colors to be different from those expected. Because of this, use toner saving only for proofing and intermediate drafts, and turn it off for final prints when top quality is important. 5 6.Dithering You can select the image mode that is best for the type of data you are printing. Auto Select this setting to automatically select a mode that is suitable for printing. Photographic Select this setting to print photographs. Text Select this setting to print text. 7.Paper Type You can select the paper type for printing as: Plain Paper, Thick Paper, or OHP Transparency. Plain Paper OHP Thick Paper Selecting an OHP Transparency as the paper type automatically adjusts internal settings to use a color profile specifically for OHP. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHP, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated on any of the dialog boxes. In this case, Color Profile is not enabled. 8.Auto Tray SW (Auto Tray Switch) You can select whether or not the printer will automatically switch to the other tray if it has the same paper size as the current tray when paper runs out while printing. On Off 88 To use this feature, the optional tray unit should be installed on the printer, and paper having the same size and direction should be loaded in both the standard and optional trays.

173 Menu Settings 9.Duplex Print You can select whether to use duplex printing or not. Off On A.Duplex Bind You can select the binding position of duplex prints. Long Edge Short Edge C.Job Timeout You can set how many seconds the printer waits before terminating a print job when the printer does not receive the end of the current print job. The job is automatically cancelled if time runs out. 000 Off 1 to 999 seconds by 1 D.I/O Timeout You can set how many seconds the printer waits for more print data before ending its wait period and terminating a job. The job is automatically cancelled if no data is received for the selected time. 000 Off 1 to 999 seconds by 1 (300 seconds) 5 E.Feed Timeout You can set how many seconds the printer waits for the correct paper size loaded, when paper runs out while printing. The job is printed with the paper currently loaded if the correct size is not loaded within the selected time. 000 Off 1 to 999 seconds by 1 (60 seconds) F.Print Errors You can select if an error report will be printed from the current tray when a PostScript error occurs while printing. Off No error report is printed when an error occurs. On An error report is printed when an error occurs. Some of the VM area is used when this feature is on. G.KTalk Mode This setting is not available. 89

174 Using the Operation Panel H.Parallel IF You can select the parallel interface timing. When SystemDefault is selected, the setting in the System Menu is used. SystemDefault ACK Inside ACK Outside System Menu The following are the settings you can make with the System Menu. Italicized settings indicate default settings Paper Tray You can select the default paper tray that is selected whenever you turn on the printer. Tray 1 Tray 2 (option) If [Auto Tray Select] is selected on the printer driver, printing starts with the tray specified here. If the specified type of paper is not set in the tray, then the paper will be fed from the other tray. 2. I/O Buffer You can select the size of the I/O buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change this setting. 16KB 32KB 64KB 128KB 256KB 512KB 1024KB 2048KB Energy Level You can select the Energy Saver mode level. Level 1 is the default setting and saves more power consumption than Level 2. When you select Off, the printer will never enter the Energy Saver mode. Level 1 Level 2 Off

175 Menu Settings 4. Energy Saver You can select after how many minutes the printer should enter the Energy Saver mode if no operation is performed. The Energy Saver mode reduces electric power consumption. 5min 15min 30min 45min 60min Important After the printer enters Energy Saver mode, it takes some time to warm up again when print data is received. 5. Transfer You can select the data transfer speed of the parallel interface. If you are having trouble with data transfers, try changing this setting to Normal. Hi-speed Normal 5 6. Image Memory This setting controls what the printer does when the printer memory is insufficient to print a certain page. On Off Off causes the message shown below to be printed when there is insufficient memory to process. There is not enough memory in your printer to print this page. Change print quality in the printer driver and try again. For details, please refer to the troubleshooting section in your manual. Selecting On reduces the resolution of the image to reduce memory requirements. 7. Parallel You can select the parallel interface timing setting. Normally it is not necessary to change this setting. ACK Inside ACK Outside STB Down 91

176 Using the Operation Panel 8. Bi-direction You can select the printer response mode for status fetch requests when the standard parallel interface is being used. Use the "Standard" setting when you are experiencing problems while the printer is connected to another manufacturer's print box. Original Mode Standard 9. PrinterLang. You can select the printer language that is automatically set when the printer is turned on. IPDL-C RPS Language You can select the language of the text that appears on the panel display. English French German Italian Dutch Spanish Japanese 32. IP Address 39. Active PTL. These items appear when the optional Network Interface Board is installed in the printer. Reference the "Setup Guide" that comes with the printer 92

177 Menu Settings Maintenance Menu This section describes two settings you can make with the Maintenance menu. Italicized settings indicate default settings. Ethernet You can select the data transfer speed when using the network interface board. Auto 10 Mbps 100 Mbps Prt.Priority You can select the timing for printing and paper feeding operation within the printer. Use the Speed setting so that the printer performs both the printing and paper feeding at the same time. Use the Quality setting so that the printer does not perform paper feeding during printing. Thus the print quality is more stabilized, while printing speed becomes slower than when selecting the Speed setting. Speed Quality 5 Changing the Printer Language This section describes how to change the printer language on the operation panel. Changing IPDL-C or RICOH-SCRIPT2 (RPS2) is required when you set the menu for each printer language. A Press {Menu}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS031E The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l 93

178 Using the Operation Panel B Press {T} or {U} to display "Select PDL", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> Select PDL j l C Press {T} or {U} to display the printer language you want to use, and then press {#Enter}. <Select PDL> j Option#1 RPS2 l D Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display. Confirm that the selected printer language appears on the panel display. 5 94

179 Printing the Configuration Page Printing the Configuration Page Use the following procedure to print the configuration page which shows the current printer settings. A Press {Menu}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS031E The following message appears on the panel display. 5 <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l B Press {T} or {U} to display "List Print", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> List Print The following message appears on the panel display. j l <List Print> j 1.Config.Page l C Confirm that 1.Config.Page is on the display, and then press {#Enter}. The following message appears on the panel display. <Config.Page> Press # key D Press {#Enter}. This starts printing the configuration page. E Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display. 95

180 Using the Operation Panel Interpreting the Configuration Page Interpreting the Configuration Page/IPDL-C Reference Firmware Version This shows the printer firmware version. Total Installed RAM This shows the total amount of memory installed in the printer. 5 Option Interface This indicates whether there is an optional parallel interface board or Network Interface Board installed in the printer. Printer Information Tray 1, Tray 2 This is the paper size specified for the standard paper tray (Tray 1) and the PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (option). If FRE is indicated for Tray 1, it means Custom Size is set for Tray 1. Total Pages This is the total number of pages printed by the printer to date. Printer Error This shows information about the status of consumable items, etc. Status List IPDL-C This shows current IPDL-C settings. P.86 IPDL-C Menu System This shows current System Menu settings. P.90 System Menu Network These are the settings and status of the optional Network Interface Board. They appear when an optional Network Interface Board is installed in the printer. 96

181 Interpreting the Configuration Page Error Log This is a log of printer errors. Interpreting the Configuration Page/RICOH-SCRIPT2 Reference Shows the printer system version and so on. You can also see the status of the paper tray. Tray Status Shows the status of the paper trays. If you install the paper feed unit, it is described as Tray2. If "FRE" is indicated for Tray 1, it means "Custom Size" is set for Tray 1. RPS2 Status Shows the current settings for the RPS2 mode. Memory Status Shows the amount of printer memory, VM area and so on. 5 Reference For more information about printer memory and VM area, see the Operating Instructions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD- ROM. Font Status This is not used for this printer. Installed Fonts Shows the fonts installed on the printer. Interface Status Shows that the Network Interface Board is installed. Network & TCP/IP Status Shows the network and TCP/IP items and their settings. Netware Status Shows the NetWare items and their settings. NetBEUI Status Shows the NetBEUI items and their settings. AppleTalk Status Shows the AppleTalk items and their settings. 97

182 Using the Operation Panel Printing the Color Sample Use the following procedure to print the color sample. You should select A4 or 8 1 / 2 11 paper to print the color sample. A Press {Menu}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape 5 Media Enter ZDHS031E The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l B Press {T} or {U} to display "List Print", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> List Print The following message appears on the panel display. j l <List Print> j 1.Config.Page l C Press {T} or {U} to display "2.Color Sample", and then press {#Enter}. <List Print> j 2.Color Samplel The following message appears on the panel display. <Color Sample> Press # key 98

183 Printing the Color Sample D Press {#Enter}. This starts printing the color sample. E Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display. 5 99

184 Using the Operation Panel Resetting Menus Use the following reset procedure to return the settings of all menus to their initial default settings. Limitation The following items do not reset. Registration ( P.64) Image Density ( P.63) A Turn on the printer's power switch. B Press {Menu}. 5 Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS031E The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l C Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> Maintenance The following message appears on the panel display. j l <Maintenance> j 1.Toner Level l 100

185 Resetting Menus D Press {T} or {U} to display "3.Menu Reset", and then press {#Enter}. <Maintenance> j 3.Menu Reset l The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu Reset> Press # key E Press {#Enter}. The following message appears on the panel display. Take Offline Then Press Reset The Maintenance menu returns. F Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display. G Press {On Line}. The On Line indicator stays off and the printer enters offline. H Press {Reset}. This resets all menus to their initial factory defaults. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display

186 Using the Operation Panel Administering Printing by User Code This printer keeps a record of the number of pages printed under each User Code set in the printer driver. Using eight digit codes allows you to keep a record of the number of prints made under each User Code for three types of printing. These are "Black" (black and white), "Two-color" (two colors or less excluding black and white) and "Full Color" (three or four colors). By assigning User Codes to each department or user in the office, for example, you can keep track of the number of pages printed by each department or user. Up to 100 User Codes can be used. 5 Important If you reinstall the printer driver, reinstall all User Codes. With Windows 95/98/Me, you can only change User Codes after reinstalling the printer driver. With Windows 95/98/Me, if the printer name is changed after installing the printer driver, User Codes will be cancelled. With Windows 95/98/Me, set User Codes during the IPDL-C printer driver installation. With Windows 2000, set User Codes on the [Statistics Code] tab of the Printer Properties after installing the IPDL-C printer driver. With Windows NT 4.0, set User Codes on the [Statistics Code] tab of the Printer Properties after installing the IPDL-C printer driver. You can view the contents of a statistics report with PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR. Using PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR, you can save the report as a CSV file. Reference For the name of PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR you use, see the inside of front cover of this manual. For more information about PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR, see PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR Help. 102

187 Administering Printing by User Code Viewing the Number of Pages Printed Under Each User Code The following procedure describes how to print the list of User Codes and the number of pages printed under each User Code. A Press {Menu}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS031E The following message appears on the panel display. 5 <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l B Press {T} or {U} to display "List Print", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> List Print The following message appears on the panel display. j l <List Print> j 1.Config.Page l C Press {T} or {U} to display "4.Statistics", and then press {#Enter}. <List Print> j 4.Statistics l The following message appears on the panel display. <Statistics> Press # key 103

188 Using the Operation Panel D Press {#Enter}. This prints the statistics report. E Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display. Reading the Statistics Report User Code Shows a list of User Codes. However, if User Codes have not been configured, "Other" appears. With RICOH-SCRIPT2, User Code is fixed to Total Indicates the total number of pages printed in "Black", "Two-color" and "Full Color" for each User Code. "All" indicates the combined total of printed pages. 3. Black Indicates the number of pages printed in black and white. 4. Two-color Indicates the number of pages printed with two colors or less (excluding black and white). 5. Full Color Indicates the number of pages printed with three or four colors. 104

189 Administering Printing by User Code Protecting the User Code Record This procedure describes how to protect the User Code record against accidental changes. A Check if the On Line indicator stays on. If not, press {On Line}. B Press {#Enter}, then {Escape}, and then {Menu}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS041E 5 The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l C Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> Maintenance The following message appears on the panel display. j l <Maintenance> j 1.Toner Level l D Press {T} or {U} to display "6.Log Protect", and then press {#Enter}. <Maintenance> j 6.Log Protect l The following message appears on the panel display. <Log Protect> j On l 105

190 Using the Operation Panel E Press {T} or {U} to select On or Off, and then press {#Enter}. <Log Protect> j Off l This registers the setting and returns to the Maintenance menu. F Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display. Deleting the User Code Record This procedure describes how to clear the User Code record. 5 If Log Protect" is set to "On", you can not delete the User Code record. Select "Off" in Log Protect", and then follow the procedure below. P.105 Protecting the User Code Record A Check if the On Line indicator stays on. If not, press {On Line}. B Press {Menu}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter ZDHS031E The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> IPDL-C Menu j l C Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> j Maintenance l The following message appears on the panel display. 106 <Maintenance> j 1.Toner Level l

191 Administering Printing by User Code D Press {T} or {U} to display "5.Log Clear", and then press {#Enter}. <Maintenance> j 5.Log Clear l The following message appears on the panel display. <Log Clear> Press # key E Press {#Enter}. This clears the User Code record. F Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display

192 Using the Operation Panel Using the Job Log This printer records a job log which shows the time of each print job, the number of pages, and the current print status of each job. The job log also shows a User ID for each job, making it easy to find the job in the log. You can set up a User ID using eight characters or less. This can help you distinguish your jobs from jobs of people who share the same User Code. Set up a User ID with the printer driver when you print. You can change the User ID every time you print. You can also browse the job log on the computer using PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR/CLIENT. Turning off the power or resetting the printer deletes the job log. 5 Limitation Up to 64 User IDs are available at the same time. If the number of IDs exceeds 64, the oldest is deleted. Reference For the name of PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR/CLIENT you use, see the inside of front cover of this manual. For more information about PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRA- TOR/CLIENT, see PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR/CLIENT Help. 108

193 Using the Job Log Printing the Job Log The following procedure describes how to print the job log. A Press {Menu}. Power On Line Data In Reset Error Menu Escape Media Enter The following message appears on the panel display. <Menu> j IPDL-C Menu l ZDHS031E 5 B Press {T} or {U} to display "List Print", and then press {#Enter}. <Menu> List Print The following message appears on the panel display. j l <List Print> j 1.Config.Page l C Press {T} or {U} to display "3.Job Log", and then press {#Enter}. <List Print> 3.Job Log The following message appears on the panel display. <Job Log> Press # key D Press {#Enter}. This prints the job log. j l 109

194 Using the Operation Panel E Press {On Line}. The "Ready" message appears on the panel display. Reading the Job Log User ID Shows a list of User IDs. However, if User IDs have not been configured, "?" appears. With RICOH-SCRIPT2, User ID is fixed to RPS2. 2. Printer Language Indicates the printer language, either IPDL-C or RICOH-SCRIPT2 (RPS2). 3. Request Time Indicates the time when the job was requested by the printer driver. This is not available with RICOH- SCRIPT2. 4. Black Indicates the number of pages printed in black and white. 5. Two-color Indicates the number of pages printed with two colors or less (excluding black and white). 6. Full Color Indicates the number of pages printed with three or four colors. 7. Status Indicates the current status of each job. 110

195 6. Appendix Color Guide Color Printing Basics Additive (Emitted) and Subtractive (Reflected) Color Models All light is a mixture of red, green, and blue, which is normally called the RGB model. When red, green, and blue are of equal intensities, the RGB color model produces white. red green blue RGB is also called additive or emitted color. The colors on your computer screen are produced by varying the intensities of RGB. Printed color is a mixture of cyan, magenta, and yellow, which is normally called the CMY color model. When mixed in equal proportions the CMY color model produces black. yellow cyan magenta CMY is also called subtractive or reflective color. The printer uses CMY toner plus K (black) toner (CMYK color model) to provide full color printing. 111

196 Appendix The colors of the RGB color model can be mixed to produce the cyan, magenta, and yellow of the CMY color model and vice versa. Two colors of one model are mixed to produce the color of the other model (mixing blue and green produces cyan, for example). The remaining color is the complement of the color produced (red in this example). Complementary colors are: red and cyan, green and magenta, blue and yellow. yellow red magenta green blue cyan Printed Color 6 The printer produces full-color output using four toner colors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These four colors make up the CMYK color model. Mixing CMY in equal proportions should hypothetically produce pure black, but imperfections in the ink cause an equal measure of these colors to produce a muddy or dark brown. Black toner is added to the color model in order to make it possible to produce pure black. 112

197 Memory Capacity and Paper Size Memory Capacity and Paper Size The following table shows the relationship between printable paper sizes and memory capacity. Resolution dpi dpi dpi Memory capacity (MB) Paper size A4 B5 JIS A5 Letter Com#10 Env DL Env Legal Custom Size 6 : Printing is possible regardless of the data volume in simplex printing, but printing jobs containing large data might not be printed in duplex printing (if duplex printing is allowed). : Printing jobs containing large data might not be printed in simplex printing, and also in duplex printing (if duplex printing is allowed). : Printing is possible in simplex printing, and also in duplex printing (if duplex printing is allowed). Limitation Duplex printing is not allowed with A5, Com#10 Env, DL Env, , , 8 13, and Custom Size paper. 113

198 Appendix Low Memory The error message shown below is output by the printer whenever there is not enough memory to print your data. There is not enough memory in your printer to print this page. Change print quality in the printer driver and try again. For details, please refer to the troubleshooting section in your manual. The following are the actions you should take when you encounter memory shortage problems. If these actions do not solve the problem individually, try them in combination with each other. A Increase printer memory. Install the optional memory unit to increase the amount of printer memory. 6 Reference For more information about how to install the optional memory unit, see the "Setup Guide" that comes with the printer. For more information about kinds of optional memory units, see P.118 Options. B Reduce the resolution. With the IPDL-C printer driver: On the [Print Quality] tab, select [Custom] and click [Setting/Change]. Then set the resolution to 300dpi. With the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver: Set the resolution to 300dpi. C Turn on Image Memory. Use the printer's System Menu to turn on Image Memory. P.90 System Menu 114

199 Moving and Transporting the Printer Moving and Transporting the Printer R CAUTION: It is recommended that at least two persons are used to lift the printer. Otherwise, the printer might fall and cause personal injury. When lifting the machine, use the grips on both sides. The machine could break or cause an injury if dropped. Before moving the machine, unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the cord is unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or cords can cause an electrical or fire hazard. When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord and causing a fire or an electric shock. When moving the printer, be sure to keep it level to avoid spilling the fuser oil. If oil is spilt, wipe it with alkaline cleaner. Otherwise, the oily surfaces can create the danger of slipping and personal injury. Important Be sure to disconnect all cables from the printer before transporting it. The printer is a precision piece of machinery. Take care to avoid damage during shipment

200 Appendix Specifications Mainframe Configuration: Desktop Print process: Laser beam and dry toner electrical photographic system Printing speed: Monochrome: 24 pages per minute Color: 6 pages per minute (A4, 8 1 / 2 " 11") Resolution: 600 dpi 6 Parallel interface: Interface Standard 36-pin printer cable and a parallel port on the host computer IEEE 1284-B I/F (Compatible, Nibble, ECP) Do not use a cable more than 2.5 meters (8.2 feet) long. Printer language: IPDL-C, RICOH-SCRIPT2 Paper size: P.21 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Paper weight: P.21 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Power source: Inside of the front cover of this manual Power consumption: Standby (Maximum) Printing (Maximum) Printing (Average) Energy Saver (Maximum) 1,350 W or less 1,350 W or less 600 W or less 35 W or less 116

201 Specifications Noise emission *1 Sound power level During printing Stand-by 62 db (A) 57 db (A) Sound pressure level *2 During printing Stand-by 49 db (A) 44 db (A) *1 The above measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779 are actual value. *2 It is measured at the position of the operator. Dimensions: Width Depth Height Printer only 500 mm (19.7") 520 mm (20.5") 410 mm (16.1") With optional Paper Feed Unit With optional paper feed unit and optional Paper Cassette With Optional paper feed unit and optional duplex unit With optional paper feed unit, optional Paper Cassette and optional duplex unit 500 mm (19.7") 520 mm (20.5") 555 mm (21.9") 500 mm (19.7") 592 mm (23.3") 555 mm (21.9") 500 mm (19.7") 605 mm (23.8") 605 mm (23.8") 500 mm (19.7") 677 mm (26.7") 605 mm (23.8") 6 Measurement conditions: With the paper tray opened. Weight: Approximately 39 kg (86 lb) (including consumables) Warm-up time: Less than 240 seconds (20 C, 68 F) Paper capacity: Standard paper tray 250 sheets *1 Optional paper feed unit 500 sheets *1 *1 Paper weight: 80 g/m 2, 20 lb Paper output capacity: 250 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20 lb) 117

202 Appendix CPU: RM MHz Memory: Standard 32 MB, up to 256 MB (with the optional SDRAM module) Network (an optional Network Interface Board required): Topology: Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) Protocol: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk 6 Optional equipment: PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 Paper Cassette Type204 (Legal) AD390 (duplex unit) Network Interface Board Type306 Memory Unit Type B 32MB Memory Unit Type B 64MB Memory Unit Type B 128MB Options PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 Paper size: P.21 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Paper weight: P.21 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Paper Cassette Type204 (Legal) Paper size: P.21 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer Paper weight: P.21 Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer 118

203 Specifications Network Interface Board Type306 Topology: Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk Interface connector: RJ45 Required cable: STP (Shielded Twisted-Pair) cable Category/Type5 or better *A cable is not enclosed with this option. Memory Unit Type B (32MB/64MB/128MB) Memory type: SD (Synchronous Dynamic) RAM Number of pins: 144 pins 6 Access time: PC

204 Appendix Consumables R CAUTION: Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using only those specified by an authorized dealer. Toner cartridge Toner cartridge *1 Average printable number of pages per cartridge *2 Cyan Magenta Yellow Black 7,200 pages 7,200 pages 7,200 pages 12,000 pages *1 For the name of toner cartridges, see the inside of front cover of this manual. *2 A4 5% test chart, 5 pages/job 6 The actual number of pages you can print with a particular toner cartridge depends on the type and size of paper you are using, the contents of your print images, and printing environment conditions. The life of a toner cartridge also shortens as the cartridge becomes older. All this means that a toner cartridge might require replacement sooner than the normal life described above. Toner cartridges that come with the printer are for setup purposes, and will not provide the number of pages described above. The average number of printable pages that can be expected from the toner cartridges included in the printer are as follows: Black toner cartridge : about 5,000 pages Cyan, magenta and yellow toner cartridges : about 3,000 pages for each 120

205 Consumables Other consumables The actual life of consumables depends on the type and size of paper you are using, the contents of your print images, and printing environment conditions. The life of consumables also shortens as the consumables become older. All this means that consumables might require replacement sooner than the life indicated. Consumables *1 Service life *2 Waste toner bottle Photoconductor unit Fuser oil Fuser cleaner 17,000 pages 60,000 pages 12,000 pages 12,000 pages *1 For the name of consumables, see the inside of front cover of this manual. *2 A4 5% test chart, 5 pages/job, for monochrome printing 6 121

206 INDEX A adhesive labels, 25 AppleTalk Status, 97 Auto Tray SW, 88 B C Bi-direction, 92 charge wire, 61 cleaning, 61 CMY, 111 CMY color model, 111 Color Mode, 86 color models, 111 ColorProfile, 87 color sample, 98 Color Set, 87 configuration page, 95, 96 custom size paper, 30 D Dithering, 88 Duplex Bind, 89 Duplex Print, 89 E Energy Level, 90 Energy Saver, 91 envelopes, 26 Error Log, 97 error messages, 35 F Feed Timeout, 89 Firmware Version, 96 Font Status, 97 fuser cleaner, 76 fuser oil bottle, 72 I J image density, 63 Image Memory, 91 Installed Fonts, 97 Interface Status, 97 I/O Buffer, 90 I/O Timeout, 86, 89 IPDL-C, 96 IPDL-C Menu, 86 IPDL-C printer driver Windows 2000, uninstall, 17 Windows 95/98/Me, uninstall, 17 Windows NT 4.0, uninstall, 18 job log, 108 Job Timeout, 86, 89 K L M KTalk Mode, 89 Language, 92 Macintosh cancel a print job, 16 RICOH-SCRIPT2, set up, 12 RICOH-SCRIPT2, uninstall, 20 Maintenance Menu, 93 media, 21 memory, 114 memory capacity, 113 Memory Status, 97 Memory Unit, 119 misfed paper, 54 mshell, 41, 44 N NetBEUI Status, 97 Netware Status, 97 Network, 96 Network Interface Board Operating Instructions, v Network Interface Board Type306, 119 Network & TCP/IP Status,

207 O OHP transparencies, 25 Option Interface, 96 ozone filter, 72 P paper, 21, 29 Paper Cassette Type204 (Legal), 118 paper feed unit, 31 PAPER FEED UNIT Type206, 118 paper, sizes, types, 21 Paper Tray, 90 paper tray, 29 Paper Type, 88 Parallel, 91 Parallel IF, 90 photoconductor unit, 68 plain paper, 24 printable area, 28 printer error, 96 Printer Information, 96 PrinterLang., 92 Printer Reference, v Print Errors, 89 printer settings, 79 Q R Quick Installation Guide, v Reference, 96, 97 Registration, 64 replace, 66 fuser cleaner, 76 fuser oil bottle, 72 ozone filter, 72 photoconductor unit, 68 toner cartridge, 66 waste toner bottle, 75 Resolution, 86 RGB, 111 RGB color model, 111 RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions, v RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver Macintosh, uninstall, 20 Windows 2000, uninstall, 19 Windows 95/98/Me, uninstall, 19 Windows NT 4.0, uninstall, 20 RPS2 Menu, 86 RPS2 Status, 97 S T Select PDL, 93 Setup Guide, v small size print area, 12 statistics report, 104 Status List, 96 status messages, 35 System, 96 System Menu, 90 thick paper, 25 toner cartridge, 66 TonerSaving, 88 Total Installed RAM, 96 total pages, 96 Transfer, 91 Tray 1, 96 Tray 2, 96 Tray Status, 97 U uninstall Macintosh, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 20 Windows 2000, IPDL-C, 17 Windows 2000, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 19 Windows 95/98/Me, IPDL-C, 17 Windows 95/98/Me, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 19 Windows NT 4.0, IPDL-C, 18 Windows NT 4.0, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 20 unix, 41, 44 UNIX Supplement, v User Code, 102 W waste toner bottle, 75 Windows 2000 cancel a print job, 14 IPDL-C, properties, 2 IPDL-C, uninstall, 17 RICOH-SCRIPT2, properties, 8 RICOH-SCRIPT2, uninstall, 19 Windows 95/98 cancel a print job, 14 Windows 95/98/Me IPDL-C, properties, 1 IPDL-C, uninstall, 17 RICOH-SCRIPT2, properties, 6 RICOH-SCRIPT2, uninstall,

208 124 Windows NT 4.0 cancel a print job, 15 IPDL-C, properties, 4 IPDL-C, uninstall, 18 RICOH-SCRIPT2, properties, 10 RICOH-SCRIPT2, uninstall, 20

209 MEMO 125

210 MEMO 126 UE USA G063

211 to users in the United States of America Notice: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/tv technician for help. Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Caution (in case of 100BaseTX environment): Properly shielded and grounded cables (STP) and connectors must be used for connections to host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits. Declaration of Conformity Product Name: Printer Model Number: AP206/SLP6c/C7006 Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ Telephone number: This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Properly shielded cables must be used for connections to host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits. Network interface cable with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression. to users in Canada : This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada Avertissement: Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch: a means POWER ON. b means POWER OFF. Copyright 2000

212 UE USA G

213 Network Interface Board Operating Instructions c1-network-300.tif Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.

214 Introduction To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Please read the Safety Information in the Printer Reference before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS. Important Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine. The names of the applications do not appear in the following pages. Confirm which applications you will be using before reading this manual. Descriptions in this manual PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT Application Aficio Manager for Admin Net Vision for Admin Aficio Manager for Client Net Vision for Client Software Version Conventions Used in This Manual NetWare 3.x means NetWare 3.12 and 3.2. NetWare 4.x means NetWare 4.1, 4.11 and IntranetWare. Trademarks Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Netscape, Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation. Novell, NetWare, NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. Sun is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. SunOS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks. The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: Microsoft Windows 95 operating system Microsoft Windows 98 operating system Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me) Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system Version 4.0 Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system Version 4.0

215 Manuals for This Printer There are six manuals that separately describe the procedures for the installation of a printer and for the operation and maintenance of the printer and its optional equipment. To enhance safe and efficient operation of the printer, all users should read and follow the instructions contained in the following manuals. Quick Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installing the printer. Setup Guide Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about installing and setting up the printer and its options. This guide is provided as a printed manual, and also as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. Printer Reference Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about using the printer and its options. The manual is included as a PDF file on the CD- ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions Describes the menus and features you can set using the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver. The manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. Network Interface Board Operating Instructions Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about setting up and using the printer in a network environment. The manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities (this manual). UNIX Supplement Provides information about setting up and using the printer in a UNIX environment. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. i

216 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury. R CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property. * The statements above are notes for your safety. Important If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating. This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation. Limitation This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together, or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used. Reference This symbol indicates a reference. [ ] Keys that appear on the machine's panel display. Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display. { } Keys built into the machine's operation panel. Keys on the computer's keyboard. ii

217 Introduction This manual contains detailed instructions on configuring the printer as a network printer. Read the section appropriate to your network environment for how to configure the printer correctly. Windows 2000, Windows NT (Server) NetWare (Server) Windows 95/98/Me Windows 2000 Windows NT NetWare (Client) Macintosh UNIX Important The procedures written in this manual assume that you are a network administrator. If you are not, be sure to consult your network administrator before configuration. Reference For more information about connecting the printer to the host computer with Network Interface Board, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. For more information about configuring the Network Interface Board with the operation panel, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Features Support for 100BASE-TX and 10BASE-T The Network Interface Board is compatible with NetWare (IPX/SPX), Windows NT (TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPP *1 ), Windows 2000 (TCP/IP, Net- BEUI, IPP *1 ), Windows 95/98/Me (TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPP *1 ), UNIX (TCP/IP) and Macintosh (AppleTalk) protocols. This allows you to use the printer in a network that uses different protocols and operating systems. A computer used as a dedicated print server is not required because the Network Interface Board can be configured as a NetWare print server. iii

218 iv The Network Interface Board can connect the printer to the network without requiring its own power supply because the Network Interface Board is installed inside the printer. *1 IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a protocol for printing via the Internet.

219 Setting Up the Printer on a Network Windows 95/98/Me For how to set up the printer as a network printer in a Windows 95/98/Me environment, see P.1 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration. There are two methods for using the printer as a network printer. Printing Without Using a Print Server Printing With a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server Windows 2000 or Windows NT Server (or Workstation) Print Server TCP/IP NetBEUI IPP Windows 95/98/Me Windows 95/98/Me v

220 Windows 2000 For how to set up the printer as a network printer in a Windows 2000 environment, see P.15 Windows 2000 Configuration. There are two methods for using the printer as a network printer. Printing Without Using a Print Server Printing With a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server Windows 2000 or Windows NT Server (or Workstation) Print Server TCP/IP NetBEUI IPP Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Windows NT 4.0 For how to set up the printer as a network printer in a Windows NT 4.0 environment, see P.31 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration. There are two methods for using the printer as a network printer. Printing Without Using a Print Server Printing With a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server Windows 2000 or Windows NT Server (or Workstation) Print Server TCP/IP NetBEUI IPP LPR Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0 vi

221 NetWare For how to set up the printer as a network printer in a NetWare environment, see P.49 NetWare Configuration. The Network Interface Board allows you to use the printer as either a print server or a remote printer. For more information about setting up the clients, see the following pages. Windows 95/98/Me P.68 Windows 95/98/Me Windows 2000 P.69 Windows 2000 Windows NT 4.0 P.70 Windows NT 4.0 Configuring the printer as a print server A dedicated NetWare print server is not required because the printer can be configured as a print server. Print Server NetWare File Server Windows 95/98/Me Windows 2000 Windows NT 4.0 The actual procedures for configuring the printer differ depending on the version of NetWare. NetWare 3.x P.54 Setting Up as a Print Server NetWare 4.x, 5 P.61 Setting Up as a Print Server vii

222 Configuring the printer as a remote printer If a dedicated NetWare print server is being used, the printer should be configured as a remote printer. Remote Printer NetWare Print Server NetWare File Server Windows 95/98/Me Windows 2000 Windows NT 4.0 The actual procedures for configuring the printer differ depending on the version of NetWare. NetWare 3.x P.57 Setting Up as a Remote Printer NetWare 4.x, 5 P.65 Setting Up as a Remote Printer Macintosh For how to set up the printer as a network printer in a Macintosh environment, see P.71 Macintosh Configuration. AppleTalk Macintosh viii

223 UNIX For how to setup the printer as a network printer in a UNIX environment, see the UNIX Supplement included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. TCP/IP UNIX ix

224 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.Windows 95/98/Me Configuration Configuring Windows 95/98/Me... 1 Printing Without Using a Print Server... 1 Printing with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server... 1 Configuring Protocols... 2 Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing... 2 Configuring NetBEUI for Printing... 3 Using PortNavi... 4 Installing PortNavi... 5 Setting Up the Printer Driver... 7 Accessing the Port Settings Dialog Box... 8 Using Multidirect Print... 9 Installing Multidirect Print... 9 Setting Up the Printer Driver Changing Port Settings Setting up a Client Computer Windows 2000 Configuration Configuring Windows Printing Without Using a Print Server Printing with a Standard TCP/IP Port Printing with a LPR Port Printing with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server Configuring the Protocols Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing Configuring NetBEUI for Printing Using PortNavi Installing PortNavi Setting Up the Printer Driver Accessing the Port Settings Dialog Box Using Multidirect Print Installing Multidirect Print Setting Up the Printer Driver Changing Port Settings Configuring LPR Port Printing Setting up a Client Computer x

225 3. Windows NT 4.0 Configuration Configuring Windows NT Printing Without Using a Print Server Printing with a LPR Port Printing with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server Configuring the Protocols Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing Configuring NetBEUI for Printing Using PortNavi Installing PortNavi Setting Up the Printer Driver Accessing the Port Settings Dialog Box Using Multidirect Print Installing Multidirect Print Setting Up the Printer Driver Changing Port Settings Configuring LPR Port Printing Setting up a Client Computer NetWare Configuration Installing the NIB Setup Tool Installing PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR Running the NIB Setup Tool Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings Setting Up as a Print Server Setting Up as a Remote Printer NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings Setting Up as a Print Server Setting Up as a Remote Printer Setting Up a Client Computer Windows 95/98/Me Windows Windows NT Macintosh Configuration Configuring Macintosh Changing to EtherTalk Configuring the Printer Changing the Printer Name Changing the Zone xi

226 6. Appendix Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser Going to the Top Page Assigning IP Address with ARP+PING Remote Maintenance by telnet Using telnet Commands List SNMP Understanding the Displayed Information Print Job Information Print Log Information Network Statistical Information Configuring the Network Interface Board Message List System Log Information Precautions Connecting a Dial Up Router to a Network PostScript Printing from Windows NetWare Printing When Using DHCP Configuring a WINS When Using the NIB Setup Tool When Using IPP with Multidirect Print Network Configuration Page Specifications INDEX xii

227 1. Windows 95/98/Me Configuration Configuring Windows 95/98/Me Printing Without Using a Print Server The following procedure describes how to configure Windows 95/98/Me to use the printer on a network without a Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows NT Server, Windows NT Workstation, or NetWare based print server. indicates topics explained in this document 1. Decide on the protocol to use Consult your network administrator about which of the three protocols are appropriate. TCP/IP IPP NetBEUI 2. Configure the chosen protocol "Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing" "Configuring NetBEUI for Printing" 3. Select the appropriate software If using TCP/IP... If using IPP or NetBEUI... PortNavi Multidirect Print 4. Install the software and set the printer driver port "Using PortNavi" "Using Multidirect Print" Printing with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server See P.13 Setting up a Client Computer for how to configure Windows 95/98/Me with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT print server. 1

228 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration Configuring Protocols 1 Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows 95/98/Me to use the TCP/IP protocol and IPP. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol. Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.) Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol. Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see P.104 When Using DHCP. After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly. A Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [MS-DOS Prompt]. B Type the following. (Example IP address is ) C:> ping If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears. Reply from : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32 If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears. Request timed out. Configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer Follow these steps to configure a Windows 95/98/Me computer to use the TCP/ IP protocol. A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Confirm that TCP/ IP is listed in the [The following network components are installed:] box on the [Configuration] tab. If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Configuration] tab and install it. For more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see Windows 95/98/Me Help. 2

229 Configuring Protocols B Configure the TCP/IP protocol with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings. Confirm with the network administrator that the settings are correct. Configuring NetBEUI for Printing 1 Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows 95/98/Me to use the NetBEUI protocol. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use the NetBEUI protocol. Confirm that the NetBEUI protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.) Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer Install the NetBEUI protocol on the Windows 95/98/Me computer and set it as the default protocol. A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Confirm that Net- BEUI is listed in the [The following network components are installed:] box on the [Configuration] tab. If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Configuration] tab and install it. For more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol, see Windows 95/98/Me Help. If NetBEUI ->Dial-Up Adaptor is listed in the [The following network components are installed:] box, select it and click [Remove] to remove the binding. B Set the NetBEUI protocol as the default protocol. Click the [Configuration] tab, select NetBEUI in the [The following network components are installed:] box, and click [Properties]. C Click the [Advanced] tab, select [Set this protocol to be the default protocol], and click [OK]. D Click [OK] to close the [Network] dialog box. E When the message to restart appears, click [Yes]. 3

230 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration Using PortNavi 1 PortNavi is a utility that helps you to use network printers effectively. It is useful in environments where two or more network printers are used. It is recommended that you install PortNavi to use Parallel Printing and Recovery Printing. For more information about PortNavi, see PortNavi Help. PortNavi features Send a print job directly to the network printers without using a print server. Notification when a printing error occurs. Print documents using other printers in the printer group when the specified printer is busy (Recovery Printing). Important The following must be the same for the specified printer and the printers selected for Recovery Printing. Printer models Installed options (e.g. Paper Tray) Size and orientation of paper in each paper tray Total memory Installed fonts (including the downloaded fonts) Equally divide the number of copies to be printed among the selected printers in the printer group (Parallel Printing). Important The following must be the same for the specified printer and the printers selected for Parallel Printing. Printer models Installed options (e.g. Paper Tray) Size and orientation of paper in each paper tray Total memory Installed fonts (including the downloaded fonts) Limitation To use PortNavi you must install PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT and use the TCP/IP protocol. For the name of the PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT you use, see the inside the front cover of this manual. For more information about installing PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Be sure to close all applications before beginning the installation process. Installing PortNavi may require the computer to be restarted. 4

231 Using PortNavi Installing PortNavi Follow the procedure below to install PortNavi. A Configure the IP parameters on the Network Interface Board using the operation panel. 1 Reference For more information about setting IP parameters, see Configuring the printer for the Network with the Operation Panel in the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the installer starts automatically, you can use it to install PortNavi. Follow the instructions on the screen. C Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. D On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [Install]. E Click [Next >]. F Type the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [Command line for installation program] box, followed by :\NETWORK\PORTNAVI\DISK1\SETUP.EXE (do not include the quotation marks), and then click [Finish]. An example would be D:\NETWORK\PORTNAVI\DISK1\SETUP.EXE when the drive letter is D. G From the [Choose Setup Language] list, select the language you want to use, and then click [OK]. H After the [Welcome] dialog box appears, click [Next >]. Follow the instructions on the screen. After installation is complete, configure the printer port with PortNavi. P.7 Setting Up the Printer Driver If the dialog box asking if you want to restart the computer appears, select [Yes, I want to restart my computer now.]. 5

232 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration Deleting the port 1 The following procedure allows you to delete the printer port. If you want to delete the port which is currently used in Windows, switch the port to another such as "FILE", then delete it. For more information about PortNavi, see PortNavi Help. A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer which uses Port- Navi to print. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. B Click the [Details] tab and confirm that the PortNavi port is shown in the [Print to the following port] box. Remember the port name because this port should be deleted later. C From the [Print to the following port] box, select [FILE]. D Click [Apply]. The port which is currently in use is changed. E Click [Delete Port]. F Click the PortNavi port name as confirmed in step B, then click [OK]. The port is deleted. G Click [OK] to close the printer properties. Uninstalling PortNavi Preparation Before uninstalling PortNavi, make sure that: The PortNavi settings dialog box is closed. No printer is using the PortNavi port as a printer port. A Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. B On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [PortNavi], and click [Add/Remove]. C After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes]. UninstallShield removes all of the components of PortNavi. D After a confirmation message, click [Yes]. E Confirm the [Remove Shared Files?] dialog box. F When the uninstallation is complete, click [OK]. 6

233 Using PortNavi Setting Up the Printer Driver The following procedure allows you to configure the printer port to use Port- Navi. Preparation The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process. A Install the printer driver of the printer you want to use. B From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Details] tab and click [Add Port]. D Click [Other], click [PortNavi] from the list and then click [OK]. The [Select Printer] dialog box appears. The displayed items are as follows: Model Name: The model name of the printer. Name: The name of the Network Interface Board. Comment: Additional information about the Network Interface Board. Address: The IP address of the printer. E Click the model name of the printer, and then click [OK]. 1 If you want to select any printer which is not shown here, click [IP Address] and input the IP address of the printer. F Confirm that the PortNavi port name is shown in the [Print to the following port] box, and click [OK]. The PortNavi port name is shown as "IP address@model name". The configuration is now complete. When printing, select the configured printer here and print as usual. Printing will be done automatically by PortNavi. 7

234 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration Accessing the Port Settings Dialog Box 1 This section describes how to access the port settings dialog box to configure for Notice, Parallel Printing, Recovery Printing and Notification. Reference For more information about these settings, see PortNavi Help. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and click [Printers]. B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Details] tab and click [Port Settings]. The PortNavi settings dialog box appears. 8

235 Using Multidirect Print Using Multidirect Print Multidirect Print allows you to print to network printers with the NetBEUI protocol and IPP. 1 Installing Multidirect Print Follow the procedure below to install Multidirect Print. This section assumes that the appropriate printer driver has already been installed on the computer. For more information about how to install the printer driver, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Preparation Be sure to close all applications before beginning the installation process. Installing Multidirect Print may require the computer to be restarted. A Close all the applications that are currently running. B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the installer starts automatically, you can use it to install Multidirect Print. Follow the instructions on the screen. C Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. D On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [Install]. E Click [Next >]. F Type the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [Command line for installation program] box, followed by :\NETWORK\MDP\DISK1\SETUP.EXE (do not include the quotation marks), and then click [Finish]. An example would be D:\NETWORK\MDP\DISK1\SETUP.EXE when the drive letter is D. G From the [Choose Setup Language] list, select the language you use, and then click [OK]. H After the [Welcome] dialog box appears, click [Next >]. Follow the instructions on the screen. After installation is complete, configure the printer port with Multidirect Print. P.10 Setting Up the Printer Driver If the dialog box asking if you want to restart the computer appears, select [Yes, I want to restart my computer now.]. 9

236 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration Uninstalling Multidirect Print 1 A Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. B On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [Multidirect Print], and click [Add/Remove]. C After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes]. UninstallShield removes all of the components of Multidirect Print. D When the uninstallation is complete, restart the computer. Setting Up the Printer Driver Multidirect Print cannot be used until the printer driver is installed and the correct port is selected. Preparation The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process. A Install the printer drivers. If the printer drivers have already been installed, you can proceed to the next step. Reference For more information about installing the printer drivers, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recommended. B From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Add Port]. D In the [Add Port] box, click [Other], click [Multidirect Print], and then click [OK]. The [Select Printer] dialog box appears, and the printers which can be printed to by TCP/IP are displayed. Limitation If PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT is not installed on the computer, printers which can be printed to by TCP/IP are not displayed. For more information about how to install the program, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. 10

237 Using Multidirect Print E Select the printer. TCP/IP A Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. 1 Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address] and then type the IP address or host name. You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when is already used, xx cannot be used. Similarly, when is already used, cannot be used. NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI]. A list of printers that can be printed to by the NetBEUI protocol appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Printers that respond to an broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address] and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm the NetBEUI address on the network configuration page. For more information about the printing of configuration page, see P.108 Network Configuration Page. You cannot print to printers beyond routers. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B In [Printer URL], type IP address)/printer as the IP address of the printer. (Example IP address is ) C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a name differing from those of any existing port names. If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name. D If using a proxy server and IPP user name, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the necessary settings. For more information about these settings, see Multidirect Print Help. 11

238 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration 1 F Click [OK]. G Confirm that the specified printing port is displayed in the [Print to the following Port] box, and click [OK]. This completes the settings. To print, select the printer specified here, and print in the usual manner. Multidirect Print will now direct print data to the printer automatically. Changing Port Settings Follow these steps to change Multidirect Print settings, such as the proxy server settings or IPP URL. There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol. A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. B Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Port Settings]. The [Port Settings] dialog box appears. For the TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Timeout Settings. For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings. For more information about these settings, see Multidirect Print Help. 12

239 Setting up a Client Computer Setting up a Client Computer This section describes the procedures for setting up a client on a network that uses Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows NT Server or Windows NT Workstation as a print server. To print from Windows 95/98/Me, you must install the printer driver and change the printer port to the print server. 1 Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server Windows 95/98/Me This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT print server. Do not begin the following procedure until the client has been set up and configured correctly. A Install the printer driver as a local printer. Reference For more information about installing the printer driver, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recommended. B Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. C Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. D Click the [Details] tab, and click [Add Port]. E Click [Network], and click [Browse]. 13

240 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration 1 F On the network tree, double-click the name of the computer used as the print server. The printers attached to the network are displayed. G Click the name of the printer you want to use, and click [OK]. H Click [OK]. I Confirm that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port] box, and click [OK]. 14

241 Configuring Windows Windows 2000 Configuration Printing Without Using a Print Server The following procedure describes how to configure Windows 2000 to use the printer on a network without a Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows NT Server, Windows NT Workstation or NetWare based print server. indicates topics explained in this document 1. Decide on the protocol to use Consult your network administrator about which of the three protocols are appropriate. TCP/IP IPP NetBEUI 2. Configure the chosen protocol "Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing" "Configuring NetBEUI for Printing" 3. Select the appropriate software If using TCP/IP... If using IPP or NetBEUI... PortNavi Multidirect Print 4. Install the software and set the printer driver port "Using PortNavi" "Using Multidirect Print" 15

242 Windows 2000 Configuration Printing with a Standard TCP/IP Port 2 Standard TCP/IP port is a standard port of Windows 2000 to enable Peer-to- Peer printing in a network environment. For more information about Standard TCP/IP port settings, see Windows 2000 Help. Printing with a LPR Port See P.28 Configuring LPR Port Printing for how to configure a LPR port in Windows Printing with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server See P.29 Setting up a Client Computer for how to configure Windows 2000 with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT print server. 16

243 Configuring the Protocols Configuring the Protocols Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows 2000 to use the TCP/IP protocol and IPP. Configuring the printer 2 Configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol. Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.) Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol. Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see P.104 When Using DHCP. After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly. A Click [Start], point to [Programs], point to [Accessories] and then click [Command Prompt]. B Type the following. (Example IP address is ) C:> ping If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears. Reply from : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32 If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears. Request timed out. Configuring a Windows 2000 computer Follow these steps to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use the TCP/IP protocol. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and Dial-up Connections]. B Click [Local Area Connection]. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. 17

244 Windows 2000 Configuration C Confirm that Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is selected in the [Components checked are used by this connection:] box on the [General] tab. 2 If the check box of TCP/IP protocol is not selected, select the box. If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Install] on the [General] tab and install it. For more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see Windows 2000 Help. D Configure the TCP/IP protocols with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings. Confirm with the network administrator that the settings are correct. Configuring NetBEUI for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows 2000 to use the NetBEUI protocol. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use the NetBEUI protocol. Confirm that the NetBEUI protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.) Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Configuring a Windows 2000 computer Follow these steps to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use the NetBEUI protocol. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and Dial-up Connections]. B Click [Local Area Connection]. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Confirm that NetBEUI Protocol is selected in the [Components checked are used by this connection:] box on the [General] tab. If the check box of the NetBEUI protocol is not selected, select the box. If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Install] on the [General] tab and install it. For more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol, see Windows 2000 Help. 18

245 Using PortNavi Using PortNavi PortNavi is a utility that helps you to use network printers effectively. It is useful in environments where two or more network printers are used. It is recommended that you install PortNavi to use Parallel Printing and Recovery Printing. For more information about PortNavi, see PortNavi Help. PortNavi features Send a print job directly to the network printers without using a print server. Notification when a printing error occurs. Print documents using other printers in the printer group when the specified printer is busy (Recovery Printing). 2 Important The following must be the same for the specified printer and the printers selected for Recovery Printing. Printer models Installed options (e.g. Paper Tray) Size and orientation of paper in each paper tray Total memory Installed fonts (including the downloaded fonts) Equally divide the number of copies to be printed among the selected printers in the printer group (Parallel Printing). Important The following must be the same for the specified printer and the printers selected for Parallel Printing. Printer models Installed options (e.g. Paper Tray) Size and orientation of paper in each paper tray Total memory Installed fonts (including the downloaded fonts) Limitation To use PortNavi you must install PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT and use the TCP/IP protocol. For the name of the PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT you use, see the inside the front cover of this manual. For more information about installing PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. If you use the Multidirect Print port for printing, the port is switched automatically to the PortNavi port. Be sure to close all applications before beginning the installation process. Installing PortNavi may require the computer to be restarted. 19

246 Windows 2000 Configuration Installing PortNavi Follow the procedure below to install PortNavi. A Configure the IP parameters on the Network Interface Board using the operation panel. 2 Reference For more information about setting IP parameters, see Configuring the printer for the Network with the Operation Panel in the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the installer starts automatically, you can use it to install PortNavi. Follow the instructions on the screen. C Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. D Click [Add New Programs], and then click [CD or Floppy]. E Click [Next >]. F Type the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [Open] box, followed by :\NETWORK\PORTNAVI\DISK1\SETUP.EXE (do not include the quotation marks), and then click [Finish]. An example would be D:\NETWORK\PORTNAVI\DISK1\SETUP.EXE when the drive letter is D. G From the [Choose Setup Language] list, select the language you use, and then click [OK]. H After the [Welcome] dialog box appears, click [Next >]. Follow the instructions on the screen. After installation is complete, configure the printer port with PortNavi. P.22 Setting Up the Printer Driver If the dialog box asking if you want to restart the computer appears, select [Yes, I want to restart my computer now.]. 20

247 Using PortNavi Deleting the port The following procedure allows you to delete the printer port. If you want to delete the port which is currently used in Windows, switch the port to another such as "FILE", then delete it. For more information about PortNavi, see PortNavi Help. A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer which uses Port- Navi to print. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. B Click the [Ports] tab and confirm that the PortNavi port is shown in the [Print to the following port(s)] box. Remember the port name because this port should be deleted later. C Click the [FILE] check box in the [Port] column. D Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties. The port which is currently in use is changed. E Open the Printer Properties of the same printer. F Click to select the [Ports] tab. G At the [Port] column in the [Print to the following port(s)] dialog box, click to select the PortNavi port name as confirmed in step B. H Click [Delete Port]. I When the confirmation message appears, click [Yes]. The port is deleted. J Click [Close] to close the Printer Properties. 2 Uninstalling PortNavi Preparation Before uninstalling PortNavi, make sure that: The port settings dialog box is closed. No printer is using the PortNavi port as a printer port. A Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. B Click the [Change or Remove Programs] tab, click [PortNavi], and click [Change/ Remove]. C After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes]. UninstallShield removes all of the components of PortNavi. 21

248 Windows 2000 Configuration D After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes]. E Confirm the [Remove Shared File?] dialog box. F When the uninstallation is complete, click [OK]. 2 Setting Up the Printer Driver The following procedure allows you to configure the printer port to use Port- Navi. Preparation The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process. A Install the printer driver of the printer you want to use. B From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port]. D Click [PortNavi] in the [Available port types:] box, and then click [New Port]. The [Select Printer] dialog box appears and printers on the network are browsed. The displayed items are as follows: Model Name: The model name of the printer. Name: The name of Network Interface Board. Comment: Additional information about Network Interface Board. Address: The IP address of the printer. E Click the model name of the printer, and then click [OK]. If you want to select any printer which is not shown here, click [IP Address] and input the IP address of the printer. F Confirm that the PortNavi port name is shown in the [Print to the following port(s)] box, and click [OK]. The PortNavi port name is shown as "IP address@model name". The configuration is now complete. When printing, select the configured printer here and print as usual. Printing will be done automatically by PortNavi. 22

249 Using PortNavi Accessing the Port Settings Dialog Box This section describes how to access the port settings dialog box to configure Notice, Parallel Printing and Recovery Printing. Reference For more information about these settings, see PortNavi Help. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and click [Printers]. B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Ports] tab and click [Configure Port]. The PortNavi settings dialog box appears. 2 23

250 Windows 2000 Configuration Using Multidirect Print Multidirect Print allows you to print to network printers with the NetBEUI protocol and IPP. 2 Installing Multidirect Print Follow the procedure below to install Multidirect Print. This section assumes that the appropriate printer driver has already been installed on the computer. For more information about how to install the printer driver, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Preparation Be sure to close all applications before beginning the installation process. Installing Multidirect Print may require the computer to be restarted. A Close all the applications that are currently running. B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the installer starts automatically, you can use it to install Multidirect Print. Follow the instructions on the screen. C Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. D Click [Add New Programs], and then click [CD or Floppy]. E Click [Next >]. F Type the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [Open] box, followed by :\NETWORK\MDP\DISK1\SETUP.EXE (do not include the quotation marks), and then click [Finish]. An example would be D:\NETWORK\MDP\DISK1\SETUP.EXE when the drive letter is D. G From the [Choose Setup Language] list, select the language you use, and then click [OK]. H After the [Welcome] dialog box appears, click [Next >]. Follow the instructions on the screen. After installation is complete, configure the printer port with Multidirect Print. P.25 Setting Up the Printer Driver 24 If the dialog box asking if you want to restart the computer appears, select [Yes, I want to restart my computer now.].

251 Using Multidirect Print Uninstalling Multidirect Print A Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. B Click [Change or Remove Programs], click [Multidirect Print], and click [Change/ Remove]. C After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes]. UninstallShield removes all of the components of Multidirect Print. D When the uninstallation is complete, restart the computer. 2 Setting Up the Printer Driver Multidirect Print cannot be used until the printer driver is installed and the correct port is selected. Preparation The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process. A Install the printer drivers. If the printer drivers have already been installed, you can proceed to the next step. Reference For more information about installing the printer drivers, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recommended. B From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Ports] tab, and click [Add Port]. D In the [Available Printer Ports] box, click [Multidirect Print], and then click [New Port]. The [Add Port] dialog box appears, and the printers which can be printed to by TCP/IP are displayed. Limitation If PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT is not installed on the computer, printers which can be printed to by TCP/IP are not displayed. For more information about how to install the program, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. 25

252 Windows 2000 Configuration E Select the printer. TCP/IP A Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. 2 Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address] and then type the IP address or host name. NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI]. A list of printers that can be printed by the NetBEUI protocol appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. IPP Printers that respond to an broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address] and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm the NetBEUI address on the network configuration page. For more information about the printing of configuration page, see P.108 Network Configuration Page. You cannot print to printers beyond routers. A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B In [Printer URL], type IP address)/printer as the IP address of the printer. C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a name differing from those of any existing port names. If you omit this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name. (Example IP address is ) D If using a proxy server and IPP user name, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the necessary settings. For more information about these setting, see Multidirect Print Help. F Click [OK]. 26

253 Using Multidirect Print G Confirm that the specified printing port is displayed in the [Print to the following Port(s)] box, and click [Close]. This completes the settings. To print, select the printer specified here, and print in the usual manner. Multidirect Print will now direct print data to the printer automatically. Changing Port Settings 2 Follow the steps to change Multidirect Print settings, such as the proxy server settings or IPP URL. There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol. A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port]. The [Port Settings] dialog box appears For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Timeout Settings. For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings. For more information about these settings, see Multidirect Print Help. 27

254 Windows 2000 Configuration Configuring LPR Port Printing This section explains the procedure for printing to a LPR port from Windows The TCP/IP protocols must be installed and configured correctly. For more information about configuring the protocol, see P.17 Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C In the [Available port types:] box, click LPR Port, and then click [New Port]. If LPR Port does not appear, Print Services for Unix has not been installed. D Type the IP address of the Network Interface Board into the [Name or address of server providing lpd:] box. E Type lp into the [Name of printer or print queue on that server box:], and click [OK]. F Click [Close]. G Confirm that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port(s)] box and the check mark is inside the check box, and then click [OK]. 28

255 Setting up a Client Computer Setting up a Client Computer This section describes the procedures for setting up a client in a network that uses Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows NT Server or Windows NT Workstation as a print server. To print from Windows 2000, you must install the printer driver and change the printer port to the print server. 2 Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server Windows 2000 This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT print server. Do not begin the following procedure until the client has been set up and configured correctly. Use the [Printers] window to set up the printer. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. This launches the Add Printer Wizard. C Click [Next >]. D Click [Network printer], and click [Next >]. E In the [Shared printers:] box, double-click the name of the computer used as a print server. The printers attached to the network are displayed. 29

256 Windows 2000 Configuration F Click the printer you want to use, and click [Next >]. 2 If the printer driver is not installed in the print server, a message appears. If a driver has been installed on the client, click [OK], and follow the instructions on the screen. There is a Windows 2000 printer driver on the CD-ROM that comes with this printer. G Select whether to use this printer as the default printer, and click [Next >]. H After installation is complete, click [Finish]. The icon of the newly installed printer appears in the [Printers] window. 30

257 Configuring Windows NT Windows NT 4.0 Configuration Printing Without Using a Print Server The following procedure describes how to configure Windows NT 4.0 to use the printer on a network without a Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows NT Server, Windows NT Workstation or NetWare based print server. indicates topics explained in this document 1. Decide on the protocol to use Consult your network administrator about which of the three protocols are appropriate. TCP/IP IPP NetBEUI 2. Configure the chosen protocol "Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing" "Configuring NetBEUI for Printing" 3. Select the appropriate software If using TCP/IP... If using IPP or NetBEUI... PortNavi Multidirect Print 4. Install the software and set the printer driver port "Using PortNavi" "Using Multidirect Print" 31

258 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration Printing with a LPR Port See P.45 Configuring LPR Port Printing for how to configure a LPR port in Windows NT 4.0. Printing with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server 3 See P.46 Setting up a Client Computer for how to configure Windows NT 4.0 with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT print server. 32

259 Configuring the Protocols Configuring the Protocols Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows NT to use the TCP/IP protocol and IPP. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol. Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.) Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol. 3 Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see P.104 When Using DHCP. After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly. A Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [Command Prompt]. B Type the following. (Example IP address is ) C:> ping If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears. Reply from : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32 If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears. Request timed out. Configuring a Windows NT computer Follow these steps to configure a Windows NT computer to use the TCP/IP protocol. A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Confirm that TCP/ IP Protocol is listed in the [Network protocols] box on the [Protocols] tab. If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Protocols] tab and install it. For more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see Windows NT Help. 33

260 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration B Configure the TCP/IP protocols with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings. Confirm with the network administrator that the settings are correct. C Click the [Services] tab, and confirm that Microsoft TCP/IP Printing is installed. If Microsoft TCP/IP Printing is not installed, click [Add] on the [Services] tab, and install it. For more information about installing and configuring network services, see Windows NT Help. 3 Configuring NetBEUI for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows NT to use the NetBEUI protocol. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use the NetBEUI protocol. Confirm that the NetBEUI protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.) Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Configuring a Windows NT computer Install the NetBEUI protocol on the Windows NT computer, and change the LAN adapter number (Lana Number). A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Confirm that Net- BEUI Protocol is listed in the [Network Protocols] box on the [Protocols] tab. If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Protocols] tab, and install it. For more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol, see Windows NT Help. B Change the Lana Number. Click the [Services] tab, click NetBIOS Interface in the [Network Services] box, and click [Properties]. C Click the Lana Number corresponding the Nbf protocol of the [Network Route] headline, and click [Edit]. 34

261 Configuring the Protocols D Type 0 as the Lana Number. If the other protocol's Lana Number is configured with 0, you must change the Lana Number a number other than 0. E Click [OK]. F Click [Close], and close the [Network] dialog box. G After confirming the message to restart, click [Yes]. After you change the Lana Number, you must restart the computer. 3 35

262 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration Using PortNavi PortNavi is a utility that helps you to use network printers effectively. It is useful in environments where two or more network printers are used. It is recommended that you install PortNavi to use Parallel Printing and Recovery Printing. For more information about PortNavi, see PortNavi Help. 3 PortNavi features Send a print job directly to the network printers without using a print server. Notification when a printing error occurs. Print documents using other printers in the printer group when the specified printer is busy (Recovery Printing). Important The following must be the same for the specified printer and the printers selected for Recovery Printing. Printer models Installed options (e.g. Paper Tray) Size and orientation of paper in each paper tray Total memory Installed fonts (including the downloaded fonts) Equally divide the number of copies to be printed among the selected printers in the printer group (Parallel Printing). Important The following must be the same for the specified printer and the printers selected for Parallel Printing. Printer models Installed options (e.g. Paper Tray) Size and orientation of paper in each paper tray Total memory Installed fonts (including the downloaded fonts) Limitation To use PortNavi you must install PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT and use the TCP/IP protocol. For the name of the PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT you use, see the inside the front cover of this manual. For more information about installing PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. On a computer that is used as a print server, do not use the features such as Parallel Printing, Recovery Printing and Notify. For more information about turning off these features, see PortNavi Help. 36

263 Using PortNavi If you use the Multidirect Print port for printing, the port is switched automatically to the PortNavi port. Be sure to close all applications before beginning the installation process. Installing PortNavi may require the computer to be restarted. Installing PortNavi Follow the procedure below to install PortNavi. A Configure the IP parameters on the Network Interface Board using the operation panel. 3 Reference For more information about setting IP parameters, see Configuring the printer for the Network with the Operation Panel in the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the installer starts automatically, you can use it to install PortNavi. Follow the instructions on the screen. C Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. D On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [Install]. E Click [Next >]. F Type the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [Command line for installation program] box, followed by :\NETWORK\PORTNAVI\DISK1\SETUP.EXE (do not include the quotation marks), and then click [Finish]. An example would be D:\NETWORK\PORTNAVI\DISK1\SETUP.EXE when the drive letter is D. G From the [Choose Setup Language] list, select the language you want to use, and then click [OK]. H After the [Welcome] dialog box appears, click [Next >]. Follow the instructions on the screen. After installation is complete, configure the printer port with PortNavi. P.39 Setting Up the Printer Driver If the dialog box asking if you want to restart the computer appears, select [Yes, I want to restart my computer now.]. 37

264 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration Deleting the port 3 The following procedure allows you to delete the printer port. If you want to delete the port which is currently used in Windows, switch the port to another such as "FILE", then delete it. For more information about PortNavi, see PortNavi Help. A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer which uses Port- Navi to print. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. B Click the [Details] tab and confirm that the PortNavi port is shown in the [Print to the following port] box. Remember the port name because this port should be deleted later. C From the [Print to the following port] box, select [FILE]. D Click [Apply]. The port which is currently in use is changed. E Click [Delete Port]. F Click the PortNavi port name as confirmed in step B, then click [OK]. The port is deleted. G Click [OK] to close the printer properties. Uninstalling PortNavi Preparation Before uninstalling PortNavi, make sure that: The port settings dialog box is closed. No printer is using the PortNavi port as a printer port. A Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. B On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [PortNavi], and click [Add/Remove]. C After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes]. UninstallShield removes all of the components of PortNavi. D After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes]. E Confirm the [Remove Shared File?] dialog box. F When the uninstallation is complete, click [OK]. 38

265 Using PortNavi Setting Up the Printer Driver The following procedure allows you to configure the printer port to use Port- Navi. Preparation The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process. A Install the printer driver of the printer you want to use. B From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Details] tab and click [Add Port]. D Click [Other], click [PortNavi] from the list and then click [OK]. The [Select Printer] dialog box appears. The displayed items are as follows: Model Name: The model name of the printer. Name: The name of the Network Interface Board. Comment: Additional information about the Network Interface Board. Address: The IP address of the printer. E Click the model name of the printer, and then click [OK]. 3 If you want to select any printer which is not shown here, click [IP Address] and input the IP address of the printer. F Confirm that the PortNavi port name is shown in the [Print to the following port] box, and click [OK]. The PortNavi port name is shown as "IP address@model name". The configuration is now complete. When printing, select the configured printer here and print as usual. Printing will be done automatically by PortNavi. 39

266 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration Accessing the Port Settings Dialog Box This section describes how to access the port settings dialog box to configure Notice, Parallel Printing and Recovery Printing. 3 Reference For more information about these settings, see PortNavi Help. A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and click [Printers]. B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Details] tab and click [Port Settings]. The PortNavi settings dialog box appears. 40

267 Using Multidirect Print Using Multidirect Print Multidirect Print allows you to print to network printers with the NetBEUI protocol and IPP. Installing Multidirect Print Follow the procedure below to install Multidirect Print. This section assumes that the appropriate printer driver has already been installed on the computer. For more information about how to install the printer driver, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. 3 Preparation Be sure to close all applications before beginning the installation process. Installing Multidirect Print may require the computer to be restarted. A Close all the applications that are currently running. B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the installer starts automatically, you can use it to install Multidirect Print. Follow the instructions on the screen. C Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. D On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [Install]. E Click [Next >]. F Type the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [Command line for installation program] box, followed by :\NETWORK\MDP\DISK1\SETUP.EXE (do not include the quotation marks), and then click [Finish]. An example would be D:\NETWORK\MDP\DISK1\SETUP.EXE when the drive letter is D. G From the [Choose Setup Language] list, select the language you want to use, and then click [OK]. H After the [Welcome] dialog box appears, click [Next >]. Follow the instructions on the screen. After installation is complete, configure the printer port with Multidirect Print. P.42 Setting Up the Printer Driver If the dialog box asking if you want to restart the computer appears, select [Yes, I want to restart my computer now.]. 41

268 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration Uninstalling Multidirect Print 3 A Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. B On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [Multidirect Print], and click [Add/Remove]. C After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes]. UninstallShield removes all of the components of Multidirect Print. D When the uninstallation is complete, restart the computer. Setting Up the Printer Driver Multidirect Print cannot be used until the printer driver is installed and the correct port is selected. Preparation The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process. A Install the printer drivers. If the printer drivers have already been installed, you can proceed to the next step. Reference For more information about installing the printer drivers, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recommended. B From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Ports] tab, and click [Add Port]. D In the [Available Printer Ports] box, click [Multidirect Print], and then click [New Port]. The [Select Printer] dialog box appears, and the printers which can be printed to by TCP/IP are displayed. Limitation If PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT is not installed on the computer, printers which can be printed to by TCP/IP are not displayed. For more information about how to install the program, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. 42

269 Using Multidirect Print E Select the printer. TCP/IP A Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address] and then type the IP address or host name. NetBEUI 3 A Click [NetBEUI]. A list of printers that can be printed by the NetBEUI protocol appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. IPP Printers that respond to an broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address] and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm the NetBEUI address on the network configuration page. For more information about the printing of configuration page, see P.108 Network Configuration Page. You cannot print to printers beyond routers. A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B In [Printer URL], type IP address)/printer as the IP address of the printer. C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a name differing from those of any existing port names. If you omit this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name. (Example IP address is ) D If using a proxy server and IPP user name, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the necessary settings. For more information about these setting, see Multidirect Print Help. F Click [OK]. 43

270 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration G Confirm that the specified printing port is displayed in the [Print to the following Port] box, and click [OK]. This completes the settings. To print, select the printer specified here, and print in the usual manner. Multidirect Print will now direct print data to the printer automatically. Changing Port Settings 3 Follow the steps to change Multidirect Print settings, such as the proxy server settings or IPP URL. There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol. A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Port Configuration]. The [Port Settings] dialog box appears For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Timeout Settings. For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings. For more information about these settings, see Multidirect Print Help. 44

271 Configuring LPR Port Printing Configuring LPR Port Printing This section explains the procedure for printing to a LPR port from Windows NT. The following procedure assumes that the printer drivers have already been installed. This is the procedure to change the printer port to LPR. The TCP/IP protocols must be installed and configured correctly. For more information about configuring the protocol, see P.33 Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Add Port]. D In the [Available Printer Ports] box, click LPR Port, and then click [New Port]. 3 If LPR Port does not appear, Microsoft TCP/IP Printing has not been installed. E Type the IP address of the Network Interface Board into the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box. F Type lp into the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and click [OK]. G Click [Close]. H Confirm that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port(s)] box and the check mark is inside the check box, and then click [OK]. 45

272 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration Setting up a Client Computer This section describes the procedures for setting up a client in a network that uses Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows NT Server or Windows NT Workstation as a print server. To print from Windows NT 4.0, you must install the printer driver and change the printer port to the print server. 3 Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server Windows NT 4.0 This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT print server. Do not begin the following procedure until the client has been set up and configured correctly. Use the [Printers] window to set up the printer. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. This launches the Add Printer Wizard. C Click [Network printer server], and click [Next >]. D In the [Shared Printers] box, double-click the name of the computer used as a print server. The printers attached to the network are displayed. E Click the printer you want to use, and click [OK]. 46 If the printer driver is not installed in the print server, a message appears. If a driver has been installed on the client, click [OK], and follow the instructions on the screen. There is a Windows NT printer driver on the CD-ROM that comes with this printer.

273 Setting up a Client Computer F Select whether to use this printer as the default printer, and click [Next >]. G After installation is complete, click [Finish]. The icon of the newly installed printer appears in the [Printers] window. 3 47

274 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration 3 48

275 4. NetWare Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the printer to use as a print server or a remote printer in a NetWare environment. NetWare must be set to active using the operation panel of the printer. For more information about how to set it, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Installing the NIB Setup Tool A utility called the NIB Setup Tool is provided to configure the printer to work in a network environment. This section describes how to install PRINTER MAN- AGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR, and how to run the NIB Setup Tool. Limitation The NIB Setup Tool is supported to work with the following operating systems. Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Installing PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR Follow these steps to install PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR. Preparation You should install PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR on the computer. If you install PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR from a file server or run it via the network, PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINIS- TRATOR might not work correctly. Be sure to close all applications before starting the installation procedure. A Close all the applications that are currently running. B Insert the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities into the CD- ROM drive. If the installer starts automatically, follow the instructions on the screen. If not, go to step C. C Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. D On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [Install]. 49

276 NetWare Configuration E Click [Next >]. F In the [command line for installation program] box, type the name of the CD-ROM drive followed by :\NETWORK\PRINTMAN\ADMIN\DISK1\SETUP.EXE (do not include the quotation marks) and then click [Finish]. 4 An example would be D:\NETWORK\PRINTMAN\ADMIN\DISK1\SET- UP.EXE when the CD-ROM drive name is D. G From the [Choose Setup Language] list, select the language you want to use, and then click [OK]. H After the [Welcome] dialog box appears, click [Next >]. I The [Software License Agreement] dialog box appears. After reading through all of the contents by clicking [PageDown], click [Yes] to agree with the License Agreement. J Select a folder to install PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR in, and then click [Next >]. If you want to change the displayed folder, click [Browse] to select another one. The installation program starts. When a confirmation dialog box appears, the installation program is complete. Running the NIB Setup Tool A Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [NIB Setup Tool] in the [PRINT- ER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR] program folder. 50

277 Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard Using the NIB Setup Tool, you can easily set up a NetWare printing environment. Reference For more information about installing the NIB Setup Tool, see P.49 Installing the NIB Setup Tool. You can select [Wizard] or [Property Sheet] as an installation method. When you configure the Network Interface Board for the first time, use the Wizard method. If you want to use the Property Sheet method, see P.54 NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings or P.60 NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings. 4 This section assumes that NetWare is functional and that the necessary environment for NetWare Print Services is available. If you configure the Network Interface Board in a NetWare environment using the NIB Setup Tool, you should install the client software released from Novell in the following cases. Windows 95/98/Me in NDS mode configuration Windows 2000 in NDS mode configuration Windows 2000 in Bindery mode configuration Windows NT 4.0 in NDS mode configuration Windows NT 4.0 in Bindery mode configuration A Log on to the Netware file server or the NDS tree as an Admin or Admin equivalent. B Run the NIB Setup Tool. Reference P.50 Running the NIB Setup Tool C Click [Wizard] and click [OK]. The [Network board list] dialog box of the Network Interface Board appears. D Click [IPX protocol]. 51

278 NetWare Configuration E Click to select the IPX address of the Network Interface Board you are configuring, and click [Next >]. 4 If you do not know which Network Interface Board you are configuring, see a network configuration page to confirm the MAC address (Network address). F Confirm that the MAC address and IPX address are correct, and click [Finish]. G Type the print server name into the [Device Name] box, and click [Next >]. The default setting is RDP_ followed by the 6 digit serial number. We recommend that you change it to something that is easier to remember or something based on the structure of the network. H In a dialog box for selecting a network environment, click to select the [Net- Ware] check box and click to clear the [TCP/IP] check box. I Click [Next >]. A dialog box for configuring the NetWare environment appears. J Select [Bindery] when printing under Bindery mode, or select [NDS] when printing under NDS mode. When you are using NetWare version 4.x, you should select [NDS]. K If you selected [Bindery], type into the [File Server Name:] box the name of the file server in which a print server is to be created. Clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box. L If you selected [NDS], type into the [Tree:] box the name of the NDS tree in which the print server is created, and type the context into the [Context:] box. Clicking [Browse], you can select a NDS tree and a NDS context among those listed in the [Browse] dialog boxes. As a context, object names are typed from a lower object and divided by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under DS, type NET.DS. M Click [Next >]. 52

279 Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard N Type the name of the printer into the [Printer Name] box, and the name of the print queue into the [Print Queue Name] box. The default setting for Printer Name is Print Server Name followed by _1 and that for Print Queue Name is Print Server Name followed by _Q (quotation marks are not included). You can change them if necessary. O If you have selected NDS mode, type the volume of the print queue into the [Queue Volume] box. Clicking [Browse], you can select one of those shown in the [Browse] dialog box. P Click [Next >]. A dialog box to confirm the printing environment appears. Q After confirming the environment, click [Next >]. If you want to change the settings, click [< Back] and make the settings again. Clicking [Next >], the NIB Setup Tool automatically creates the Print Server, the Printer, and the Print Queue in the NetWare network. R After a confirmation dialog box appears, select [Quit] and click [Finish] to exit the NIB Setup Tool. 4 53

280 NetWare Configuration NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings The actual procedures for configuring the printer differ depending on whether the Network Interface Board is configured as a print server or as a remote printer. This section describes how to configure it in the NetWare 3.x environment. Basic Procedure Install the NIB Setup Tool Print Server Remote Printer 4 Configure the Network Interface Board Configure the NetWare Turn the power off and on Start the print server Preparation The following procedures use the Property Sheet method in configuring the Network Interface Board. If you configure the Network Interface Board as a NetWare print server for the first time, we recommend you use the Wizard method. P.51 Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard This section assumes NetWare is functional and that the necessary environment for the NetWare Print Service is available. Setting Up as a Print Server A Log on to the file server as a Supervisor or a Supervisor equivalent. B Run the NIB Setup Tool. Reference P.50 Running the NIB Setup Tool C Click [Property Sheet] and click [OK]. The [Browse] dialog box of the Network Interface Board appears. D Click [IPX protocol]. 54

281 NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings E Click the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be configured, and then click [Next >]. If you do not know which Network Interface Board you are configuring, see a network configuration page to confirm the MAC address (Network Address). F Confirm that the MAC address and IPX address are correct, and click [Finish]. The [NIB Setup Tool] window appears. G Click [Configure]. The property sheet appears. H Click the [General] tab, and type the name of the print server into the [Device Name] box. I Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings. A Select [Bindery]. B In the [File Server Name:] box, type the name of the file server in which a print server is to be created. Click [Browse] to select a file server among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box. C Click [OK] to close the property sheet. D After a confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK]. J On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit the NIB Setup Tool. K Type PCONSOLE from the command prompt. F:> PCONSOLE L Create a print queue as follows. 4 If you use a currently defined print queue, go to step M. A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Queue Information] and press the {ENTER} key. B Press the {INSERT} key and type a print queue name. C Press the {ESC} key to return to the [Available Options] menu. 55

282 NetWare Configuration M Create a printer as follows. A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Server Information] and press the {ENTER} key. B To create a new print server, press the {INSERT} key and type a print server name. If you use a currently defined print server, select one of the print servers shown in the [Print Server] list. 4 Important Use the same name as that specified in the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H). C From the [Print Server Information] menu, select [Print Server Configuration]. D From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Printer Configuration]. E Select the printer which is indicated as Not Installed. F If you want to change the name of the printer, type a new name. A name "Printer x" is assigned to the printer. x stands for the number of the selected printer. G As Type, select [Remote Other/Unkown]. The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automatically configured. H Press the {ESC} key, and click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box. I Press the {ESC} key to return to the [Print Server Configuration] menu. N Assign print queues to the created printer as follows. A From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Queues Serviced By Printer]. B Select the printer created in step M. C Press the {INSERT} key to select a queue serviced by the printer. You can select more than one queue at a time. D Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings. When you have finished the previous steps, confirm that the queues are assigned. O Press the {ESC} key until Exit? appears, and select [Yes] to exit PCON- SOLE. P Turn the printer power off and on. 56 To confirm that the printer is configured correctly, type as follows from the command prompt. F:> USERLIST If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as an attached user.

283 NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings Setting Up as a Remote Printer A Log on to the file server as a Supervisor or a Supervisor equivalent. B Run the NIB Setup Tool. Reference P.50 Running the NIB Setup Tool C Click [Property Sheet] and click [OK]. The [Browse] dialog box of the Network Interface Board appears. D Click [IPX protocol]. E Click the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be configured, and click [Next >]. 4 If you do not know which Network Interface Board you are configuring, see a network configuration page to confirm the MAC address (Network Address). F Confirm that the MAC address and IPX address are correct, and click [Finish]. The [NIB Setup Tool] window appears. G Click [Configure]. The property sheet appears. H Click the [General] tab, and type the name of the print server into the [Device Name] box. I Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings. A In the [Print Server Name] box, type the name of the print server. B In the [File Server Name] box, type the name of the file server in which a print server is to be created. Clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box. C In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Remote Printer]. D In the [Remote Printer No.] box, type the printer number. Important Use the same printer number as that to be created in the printer server. E Click [OK] to close the property sheet. F After a confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK]. 57

284 NetWare Configuration J On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit the NIB Setup Tool. K Type PCONSOLE from the command prompt. F:> PCONSOLE L Create a print queue as follows. 4 If you use a currently defined print queue, go to step L. A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Queue Information] and press the {ENTER} key. B Press the {INSERT} key and type a print queue name. C Press the {ESC} key to return to the [Available Options] menu. M Create a printer as follows. A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Server Information] and press the {ENTER} key. B To create a new print server, press the {INSERT} key and type a print server name. If you use an currently defined print server, select one of the print servers shown in the [Print Server] list. Important Use the same name as that specified in the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H). C From the [Print Server Information] menu, select [Print Server Configuration]. D From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Printer Configuration]. E Select the printer which is indicated as Not Installed. Important Use the same number as that specified as Remote Printer No. using the NIB Setup Tool. (Step I-D). F If you change the name of the printer, type a new name. A name "Printer x" is assigned to the printer. x stands for the number of the selected printer. G As type, select [Remote Parallel, LPT1]. The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automatically configured. H Press the {ESC} key, and click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box. I Press the {ESC} key to return to [Print Server Configuration Menu]. 58

285 NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings N Assign print queues to the created printer as follows. A From [Print Server Configuration Menu], select [Queues Serviced By Printer]. B Select the printer created in step L. C Press the {INSERT} key to select a queue serviced by the printer. You can select more than one queue at a time. D Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings. When you have finished the above steps, confirm that the queues are assigned. O Press the {ESC} key until Exit? appears, and select [Yes] to exit PCON- SOLE. P Start the print server by typing the following from the console of the Net- Ware Server. If it is running, restart it after exiting it. 4 To exit CAREE: unload pserver To start CAREE: load pserver print_server_name If the printer works as configured, Waiting for job appears. 59

286 NetWare Configuration NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings The actual procedures for configuring the printer differ depending on whether the Network Interface Board is configured as a print server or as a remote printer. This section describes how to configure it in the NetWare 4.x, 5 environment. To use NetWare 5 You cannot use the NDPS (Novell Distributed Print Services) mode. If you use Pure IP, configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol. For more information about how to make the settings, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. 4 Basic Procedure Install the NIB Setup Tool Print Server Remote Printer Configure the Network Interface Board Configure the NetWare Turn the power off and on Start the print server Preparation The following procedures use the Property Sheet method in configuring the Network Interface Board. If you configure the Network Interface Board as a NetWare print server for the first time, we recommend you use the Wizard method. P.51 Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard This section assumes NetWare is functional and that the necessary environment for the NetWare Print Service is available. You should install the client software released from Novell on the Windows before running the NIB Setup Tool for configuring in NDS mode or using Windows NT

287 NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings Setting Up as a Print Server Important You can set up the print server using the NDS or Bindery mode in NetWare 4.x, 5. The following procedure is for setting up the print server using the NDS mode in NetWare 4.1. When you set up the print server using the Bindery mode, use the NIB Setup Tool Wizard. P.51 Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard. If you use Pure IP in NetWare 5, follow the procedure on P.63 Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 environment. A Log on to the file server as an Admin or an Admin equivalent. B Run the NIB Setup Tool. 4 Reference P.50 Running the NIB Setup Tool C Click [Property Sheet] and click [OK]. The [Browse] dialog box of the Network Interface Board appears. D Click [IPX protocol]. E Click the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be configured, and click [Next >]. If you do not know which Network Interface Board you are configuring, see a network configuration page to confirm the MAC address (Network Address). F Confirm that the MAC address and IPX address are correct, and click [Finish]. The [NIB Setup Tool] window appears. G Click [Configure]. The property sheet appears. H Click the [General] tab, and type the name of the print server into the [Device Name] box. 61

288 NetWare Configuration I Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings. A Select [NDS]. B Type into the [Tree:] box the name of the NDS tree in which the print server is created, and type the context into the [Context:] box. Clicking [Browse], you can select a NDS tree and a NDS context among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box. As a context, object names are typed from a lower object and divided by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under DS, type "NET.DS". 4 C Click [OK] to close the property sheet. D After a confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK]. J On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit the NIB Setup Tool. K From Windows, run NWAdmin. Reference For more information about NWAdmin, see the documentation that comes with the NetWare. L Create a print queue as follows. A Select the container object the print queue is located in among those in the directory tree, and click [Create] on the [Object] menu. B In the [Class of new object] box, click Print Queue, and click [OK]. C In the [Print Queue name] box, type the name of the print queue. D In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click the [Browse] button. E In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is created, and click [OK]. F After confirming the settings, click [Create]. M Create a printer as follows. A Select the container object the printer is located in, and click [Create] on the [Object] menu. B In the [Class of new object] box, click Printer, and click [OK]. When you are using NetWare 5, click Printer (Non NDPS). C In the [Printer name] box, type the name of the printer. D Click [Define additional properties] to check a box, and click [Create]. 62

289 NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings N Assign print queues to the created printer as follows. A Click [Assignments], and click [Add] in the [Assignments] group. B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in step L, and click [OK]. C Click [Configuration], and in the [Printer type] box, select [Parallel] using the drop-down menu, and then click [Communication]. D Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] group, and click [OK]. E After confirming the settings, click [OK]. O Create a print server as follows. A Select the context specified using the NIB Setup Tool (step I-A), and on the [Object] menu, click [Create]. B In the [Class of new object] box, click Print Server, and click [OK]. When you are using NetWare 5, click Print Server (Non NDPS). C In the [Print Server name] box, type the name of the print server. 4 Important Use the same name as that specified using the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H) D Click [Define additional properties] to check a box, and click [Create]. P Assign the printer to the created print server as follows. A Click [Assignments], and click [Add] in the [Assignments] group. B In the [Available objects] box, click the printer created in step M, and click [OK]. C After confirming the settings, click [OK]. Q Turn the printer power off and on. If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as an attached user. Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 environment A Log on to the file server as an Admin or an Admin equivalent. B Run the NIB Setup Tool. Reference P.50 Running the NIB Setup Tool C Click [Property Sheet] and click [OK]. The [Network board list] dialog box appears. 63

290 NetWare Configuration D Click [TCP/IP protocol]. E Click the IP address of the Network Interface Board which is to be configured, and click [Next >]. 4 If you do not know which Network Interface Board you are configuring, see a network configuration page to confirm the MAC address (Network Address). F Confirm that the MAC address and IP address are correct, and click [Finish]. The [NIB Setup Tool] window appears. G Click [Configure]. The property sheet appears. H Click the [General] tab, and type the name of the print server into the [Device Name:] box. I Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings. A In the [Print Server Name:] box, type the name of the print server. B In the [File Server Name:] box, type the name of the file server in which a print server is to be created. Clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the [Browse File Server] dialog box. C In the [NDS Context:] box, type the context of the print server. Clicking [Browse], you can select a NDS tree and a NDS context among those listed in the [Browse Context] dialog box. As a context, object names are typed from a lower object and divided by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under DS, type "NET.DS". D In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Print Server]. E Click [OK] to close the property sheet. F After a confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK]. J On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit the NIB Setup Tool. After this step, go to step K on P.61 Setting Up as a Print Server. 64

291 NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings Setting Up as a Remote Printer A Log on to the file server as an Admin or an Admin equivalent. B Run the NIB Setup Tool. Reference P.50 Running the NIB Setup Tool C Click [Property Sheet] and click [OK]. The [Browse] dialog box of the Network Interface Board appears. D Click [IPX protocol]. E Click the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be configured, and click [Next >]. 4 If you do not know which Network Interface Board you are configuring, see a network configuration page to confirm the MAC address (Network Address). F Confirm that the MAC address and IPX address are correct, and click [Finish]. The [NIB Setup Tool] window appears. G Click [Configure]. The property sheet appears. H Click the [General] tab, and type the name of the print server into the [Device Name] box. I Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings. A In the [Print Server Name] box, type the name of the print server. B In the [File Server Name] box, type the name of the file server in which a print server is to be created. Clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box. 65

292 NetWare Configuration C In the [NDS Context] box, type the context in which the print server is to be created. Clicking [Browse], you can select a context among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box. As an context, object names are typed from a lower level object and divided by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under DS, type NET.DS. 4 D In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Remote Printer]. E In the [Remote Printer No.] box, type the number of the printer. Important Use the same number as that of the printer to be created in the print server. F Click [OK] to close the property sheet. G After a confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK]. J On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit the NIB Setup Tool. K From Windows, run NW Admin. Reference For more information about NWAdmin, see the documentation that comes with the NetWare. L Create a print queue as follows. A Select the container object the print queue is located in among those in the directory tree, and click [Create] on the [Object] menu. B In the [Class of new object] box, click Print Queue, and click [OK]. C In the [Print Queue name] box, type the name of the print queue. D In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click [Browse] button. E In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is created, and click [OK]. F After confirming the settings, click [Create]. M Create a printer as follows. A Select the container object the printer is located in, and click [Create] in the [Object] menu. 66

293 NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings B In the [Class of new object] box, click Printer, and click [OK]. When you are using NetWare 5, click Printer (Non NDPS). C In the [Printer name] box, type the name of the printer. D Click [Define additional properties] to check a box, and click [Create]. N Assign print queues to the created printer as follows. A Click [Assignments], and click [Add] in the [Assignments] group. B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in step L, and click [OK]. C Click [Configuration], and in the [Printer type] box, select [Parallel] using the drop-down menu, and then click [Communication]. D Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] group, and click [OK]. E After confirming the settings, click [OK]. O Create a print server as follows. A Select the context specified using the NIB Setup Tool (Step I-A), and on the [Object] menu, click [Create]. B In the [Class of new object] box, click Print Server, and click [OK]. When you are using NetWare 5, click Print Sever (Non NDPS). C In the [Print Server name] box, type the name of the print server. 4 Important Use the same name as that specified using the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H). D Click [Define additional properties] to check a box, and click [Create]. P Assign the printer to the created print server as follows. A Click [Assignments], and click [Add] in the [Assignments] group. B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in the step M, and click [OK]. C In the [Printers] group, click the printer assigned in step B, and click [Printer Number]. D Type the printer number and click [OK]. Important Use the same number as that specified as Remote Printer No. using the NIB Setup Tool. (Step I-E). E After confirming the settings, click [OK]. Q Start the print server by typing the following from the console of the Net- Ware Server. If it is running, restart it after exiting it. To exit CAREE: unload pserver To start CAREE: load pserver print_server_name 67

294 NetWare Configuration Setting Up a Client Computer This section describes how to set up a client computer when using a NetWare print server. This section assumes that the client has NetWare client applications installed and is correctly configured to communicate with a NetWare print server. If not, install the necessary applications before starting the setting up procedure. 4 Windows 95/98/Me Follow the procedure to set up a Windows 95/98/Me client. Preparation Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure. A Install the printer driver you want to use as Local printer. Reference For more information about installing the printer driver, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recommended. B Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. C In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. D On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. E Click the [Details] tab, and click [Add Port]. F Click [Network] and click [Browse]. G On the network tree, double-click the name of the file server. The queues are displayed. H Click the queue you want to print, and click [OK]. I Click [OK]. In the [Print to the following port] box, a network path to the printer appears. J Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties, and again, open it. 68

295 Setting Up a Client Computer K Click the [Printer Settings] tab. L Click to clear the [Form feed] and [Enable banner] check boxes. You should not check these boxes because they should be specified using the printer driver. If they are selected, the printer might not print correctly. When using the PostScript printer driver Follow these steps to set up for the PostScript printer driver. A Click the [PostScript] tab. B Click [Advanced]. C Click to clear the [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job] check boxes. M Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties. 4 Windows 2000 Follow the procedure to set up a Windows 2000 client. Preparation Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure. A Double-click the [My Network Places] icon on the desktop and navigate to the queue you want to use, and then double-click it. The printers dialog box appears. B Click [No]. C Close all the applications that are currently running. D Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the setup menu starts automatically, you can go to the next step. If not, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. E The [Printer Installation] dialog box appears. F From the [Port] list, select the queue you selected in step A, and click [Next >]. G Follow the instructions on the screen to finish the installation of the printer driver. 69

296 NetWare Configuration Windows NT 4.0 Follow the procedure to set up a Windows NT 4.0 client. Preparation Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure. A Double-click the [Network Neighborhood] icon on the desktop and navigate to the queue you want to use, and then double-click it. The [Printers] dialog box appears. 4 B Click [No]. C Close all the applications that are currently running. D Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the setup menu starts automatically, you can go to the next step. If not, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. E The [Printer Installation] dialog box appears. F From the [Port] list, select the queue you selected in step A, and click [Next >]. G Follow the instructions on the screen to finish the installation of the printer driver. 70

297 5. Macintosh Configuration Configuring Macintosh This section describes how to configure a Macintosh computer to use EtherTalk. The actual procedures to configure a Macintosh may differ depending on the version of the Mac OS. The following procedure describes how to configure Mac OS 8. If you are not using Mac OS 8, see the manual that comes with your version of the Mac OS for more information. Basic Procedure Change to EtherTalk Configure the printer Change the printer name Change the zone Limitation To print from a Macintosh, use RICOH-SCRIPT2. You cannot print with IPDL-C. Changing to EtherTalk Follow the procedure to configure a Macintosh computer to use EtherTalk. Reference For more information about installing the software required for EtherTalk, see the Macintosh manuals. A Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [AppleTalk] icon. B From the [Connect via:] pop-up menu, select Ethernet. C If you change zones, select a name from the [Current zone:] pop-up menu. D Close the [AppleTalk] control panels. E Restart the Macintosh. 71

298 Macintosh Configuration Configuring the Printer Use the operation panel to activate the EtherTalk protocol. (The factory default is active.) Reference For more information about configuration, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Changing the Printer Name 5 If the network has several same model printers, the names will be the same. Printers that have the same name will have their names changed slightly in the Chooser. For example, three printers named printer will appear in the chooser as printer0, printer1 and printer2. Use applications such as Apple Printer Utility or LaserWriter Utility to change printer names in the Macintosh EtherTalk environment. These utilities are distributed by Apple Computer, Inc. Changing the Zone It may be necessary to change the zone configuration. Use applications such as Apple Printer Utility or LaserWriter Utility to change the zone configuration in the Macintosh EtherTalk environment. These utilities are distributed by Apple Computer, Inc. If the Macintosh is configured to use TCP/IP, you can change the zone configuration with a Web Browser. P.75 Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser Follow these steps to use the Apple Printer Utility. A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. B Copy the Zone Name.ps file in the Zone Name folder to the hard disk. C Open the copied Zone Name ps file using a text editor, and change New- Zone, which is in the second line from the bottom, to the name of the new zone. %!PS-Adobe2.0 %% Title: Changing Zone (EtherNet only) %%CreationDate: Tue Dec %%EndComments true 0 startjob not {ERROR}if (%EtherTalk%) << /EtherTalkZone (NewZone) >> setdevparams %%EOF D Save Zone Name.ps. 72

299 Configuring Macintosh E Run the Apple Printer Utility, and select the printer for which the new zone name is to be used. F Select [Send PostScript File] in the [Utilities] menu, and send Zone Name.ps to the printer. 5 73

300 Macintosh Configuration 5 74

301 6. Appendix Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser The Network Interface Board functions as a Web server in addition to allowing a printer to function as a network printer. You can use a Web Browser to view the printer status and configure the Network Interface Board. Configuring the printer This requires the TCP/IP protocol to be installed. After the printer has been configured to use the TCP/IP protocol, it will be possible to adjust the settings using a Web Browser. Reference For more information about configuring the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Operating system browser requirements OS Browser Windows 95/98/Me Windows 2000 Windows NT 4.0 Mac OS Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.02/4.0 or later Netscape Navigator 3.0/4.0 or later Solaris Limitation Sometimes after clicking [Back], the previous page may not appear. In this case, click [Refresh] or [Reload]. The text on the screen may disappear or be aligned incorrectly if the font size settings of the browser are too large. It is recommended that you use a font size equal to or smaller than 10 point with Netscape Navigator, and Medium or smaller with Internet Explorer. 75

302 Appendix Going to the Top Page After launching the Web Browser, type the IP address of the printer. See the example below. This example is for the English version. (In this example, the IP address of the Network Interface Board is ) If a DNS server is used on the network, you can type the host name as an URL. For example, In order to do this, you must register the IP address and host name of the Network Interface Board with the DNS server. Consult the network administrator for information about how to do this. If the network uses proxy servers, the browser may run slowly Header Buttons You can register favorite URLs with [URL]. To view the Help section, click [Help]. Important It costs to use the browser to access a website. Help is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM in HTML format. The third folder, "(Language)" may be substituted by an appropriate language name. \HELP\WSMHLP\(Language)\ 2. Menu Buttons Buttons to configure the Network Interface Board and confirm the status of the printer. When you click [Network Config], a dialog box appears requesting the user name and password. Type only the password in this dialog box. The factory default password is password. The password is the same as that used for remote maintenance and that used in the NIB Setup Tool. If you change a password with the Web Browser, the other passwords are also changed. 3. Status Displays the name and comments of the Network Interface Board, and the printer status. 76

303 Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser -Linking the address (URL) to the [Help] button You can link the address (URL) of the [Help] button to the Help files on the computer or on a Web server. A Copy the Help files on the CD-ROM to the desired location. The Help files are located in folders labeled with abbreviated language names. For example, English Help files are in the [EN] folder. Be sure to copy the entire [EN] folder to the new location. B Using a Web Browser, navigate to the Top Page and click [Network config]. C Type your password, (it is not necessary to type a user name) and click [OK]. D Type the path to the Help files in the [Help URL] box. If you copied the Help files to "C:\HELP\EN", type "file://c:/help/". For example if you copied the files to a web server and the index URL is " a.b.c.d/help/en/index.html", type " E Click [Apply]. When a warning message appears, select to continue configuration. 6 77

304 Appendix Assigning IP Address with ARP+PING Using TCP/IP, you can assign the IP address using ARP and PING. The following example is for a BSD UNIX workstation (SunOS 4.x). Preparation ARP+PING should be set to active on the network boot configuration before assigning the IP address using ARP+PING. For more information about setting it to active, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. A Log on to the workstation as root. B Use the arp command to assign the IP address to the MAC address of the Network Interface Board. # arp -s :00:74:62:5C: is the IP address, 00:00:74:62:5C:65 is the MAC address. C Assign the IP address using the ping command. # ping D Use the ping command again to confirm the address. # ping If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears is alive If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears. no answer from How to Confirm the MAC Address The MAC address (Ethernet address) of the Network Interface Board is required in order to use ARP and PING to assign the IP address. The MAC address can be seen on the network configuration page. Reference For how to print the network configuration page, see P.108 Network Configuration Page. The MAC address can also be seen on the printer configuration page. For more information about the printer configuration page, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. 78

305 Remote Maintenance by telnet Remote Maintenance by telnet You can view the printer status and configure the Network Interface Board using telnet. You should specify a password so that only the network administrator, or a person having network administrator privileges, can use remote maintenance. Using telnet The following is a sample procedure in using telnet. Limitation Only one person at a time can be logged on to do remote maintenance. A Using the IP address or host name of the printer, start telnet. % telnet IP_address In order to use the host name instead of the IP address, you must write it to the /etc/hosts file. B Type the password. The factory default is password. C Type a command. Reference For more information about telnet commands, see P.80 Commands List. 6 D Exit telnet. msh> logout When the configuration is changed, a confirmation message requests whether or not the changes should be saved. E Type yes to save the changes, and press the {ENTER} key. If you do not want to save the changes, type no and press the {ENTER} key. If you want to make additional changes, type return at the command line, and press the {ENTER} key. 79

306 Appendix If the Can not write NVRAM information message appears, the changes are not saved. Repeat the steps above. The Network Interface Board is reset automatically when the settings are changed. When the Network Interface Board is reset, the active print job which has already been sent to the printer will finish printing. However, jobs that have not been sent yet will be canceled. Commands List This is a list of commands that can be used via remote maintenance. 6 Type help to see a list of commands that can be used. msh> help Type help command_name to display information about the syntax of that command. msh> help command_name TCP/IP address Use the ifconfig command to configure TCP/IP for the printer (IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address, default gateway address). Reference msh> ifconfig Configuration msh> ifconfig le0 parameter address Parameter (no parameter) netmask gateway Meaning IP address subnet mask default gateway address The following is an example for configuring an IP address of msh> ifconfig le The following is an example for configuring a subnet mask of msh> ifconfig le0 netmask This affects the configuration of the Network Interface Board of the IP address that is used. To type an address using hexadecimal, prefix it by 0x.

307 Remote Maintenance by telnet -Address Subnet Mask A number used to mathematically mask or hide the IP address on the network by eliminating those parts of the address that are alike for all the machines on the network. Default Gateway Address A gateway is a connection or interchange point that connects two networks. A gateway address is for the router or host computer used as a gateway. To get the above addresses, contact your network administrator. Access Control Use the access command to view and configure access control. You can also configure multiple access controls with the multi command. Reference msh> access 6 Configuration msh> access parameter address Parameter control mask Meaning Access Control Address Access Control Mask The Access Control Address and the Access Control Mask are used to limit access to the computer used for printing by denying access to users based on their IP address. If it is not necessary to limit access, set the Access Control Mask to When the Access Control Address matches the masked result of the IP address computer attempting to print, print jobs from that IP address will be accepted by the Network Interface Board. 81

308 Appendix For example, if you assign as the Access Control Address of the Network Interface Board, the IP addresses that can print are as follows. XXX means any number from 1 to 255 is acceptable. Access Control Mask IP addresses that can access the printer XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX XXX.XXX.XXX XXX.XXX XXX Configuration for multiple access controls msh> access multi {on off} on means active and off means inactive. msh> access {1-5} parameter address 6 Up to 5 access controls are available. Specify the number (1-5) when configuring some access controls. If this is not configured, the first setting is selected. Network Boot Use the set command to configure the boot method. msh> set parameter {on off} on means active and off means inactive. Parameter ping tftp bootp dhcp Meaning ARP+PING RARP+TFTP BOOTP DHCP When you use RARP+TFTP, BOOTP or DHCP, the server also needs to be configured. DHCP takes precedence over all other settings. 82

309 Remote Maintenance by telnet Protocol Use the set command to allow/prevent remote access for each protocol. msh> set protocol {up down} Protocol appletalk tcpip netware netbeui lpr ftp rsh diprint web npmp snmp ipp up means active and down means inactive. If you prohibit remote access using TCP/IP and then log out, you cannot use remote access. If this was a mistake, you can use the printer operation panel to allow access by TCP/IP. When you prevent access via TCP/IP, you are also prevented from using lpr, ftp, rsh, diprint, and web. 6 Printer status The following commands can be used to get information about the current status of the printer. msh> command Command status info prnlog [ID] netstat Information that is displayed Status of printer. Information about the print jobs. Information about the paper tray, output tray and printer language of the printer. Lists the last 10 print jobs. Information about the Network Interface Board. More information about any print job is displayed when the ID number is added after the prnlog command. 83

310 Appendix Reference For more information about the meaning of the data returned with these commands, see Getting Printer Information over the Network in the Printer Reference included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM or P.93 Configuring the Network Interface Board. Network Interface Board configuration settings information Use the show command to display the Network Interface Board configuration settings. msh> show [-p] Add -p to the show command to have the information displayed one screen at a time. Reference For more information about the meaning of the data returned with this command, see P.93 Configuring the Network Interface Board. 6 System log information Use the syslog command to display information stored in the printer's system log. msh> syslog Reference For more information about the displayed information, see P.96 System Log Information. SNMP Use the snmp command to display and edit SNMP configuration settings such as the community name. You can configure from ten SNMP access settings numbered Default access settings 1 and 2 are as follows. Number 1 2 Community name public admin IP address Access type read-only trap off read-write trap off 84

311 Remote Maintenance by telnet Display Shows the SNMP information and available protocols. msh> snmp? msh> snmp [-p] [registered_number] If the -p option is added, you can view the settings one by one. Omitting the number displays all access settings. Community name configuration You can set the community name of the Network Interface Board. msh> snmp number name community_name The community name must consist of 15 characters or less. Access type configuration You can select the access type from those listed below. msh> snmp number type access_type Access type read write trap no Type of access which is permitted Read only Read and write User is notified of trap messages. All access is denied. 6 Protocol configuration You should use the following command to set the protocols to active or inactive. If you set a protocol to inactive, all access settings set to use that protocol are disabled. msh> snmp {ip ipx} {on off} on means active and off means inactive To change the protocol of an access settings, use the following command. However, if you disabled a protocol with the above command, making it active here will have no effect. msh> snmp number active {ip ipx} {on off} Access configuration You can configure an address of a host depending on the protocols used. The Network Interface Board accepts requests only from hosts having addresses with access types of read-only or read-write. Type 0 to have the Network Interface Board accept requests from any host without requiring a specific type of access. Command syntax: msh> snmp number {ip ipx} address 85

312 Appendix To specify the TCP/IP protocol, type ip followed by a space and then the IP address. To specify the IPX/SPX protocol, type ipx followed by a space and then the IPX address followed by a decimal and then the MAC address of the Network Interface Board. The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 with the IP address msh> snmp 3 ip The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 with the IPX address 7390A448, and the MAC address 00:00:74:62:5C:65. msh> snmp 3 ipx 7390A C65 IPP Use the ipp command to configure the IPP settings. 6 View settings The following command displays the current IPP settings. msh >ipp Example output: timeout=900(sec) auth basic The "timeout" setting specifies how many seconds the computer keeps trying to access the network printer to send print jobs when no connection could be made. The "auth" setting indicates the user authorization mode. IPP timeout configuration Specify how many seconds to wait before canceling a print job if it has been interrupted for some reason. The range of time can be changed between 30 to seconds. msh>ipp timeout { } IPP user authorization configuration Use the IPP user authorization to restrict users that can print with IPP. The factory default is "off". ipp auth {basic digest off} "basic" and "digest" are user authorization setting. "off" removes a user's authorization. If you select "basic" or "digest", see next section Entry the IPP User Authorization for how to configure the user name. Up to ten user names are available. 86

313 Remote Maintenance by telnet Configuring IPP user authorization Use the following command: ipp user The following message appears. Input user number (1 to 10): Type the number, user name and password. IPP user name:user1 IPP password:******* After configuring the settings, the following message appears. User configuration changed. Changing the password Use the passwd command to change the remote maintenance password. Important Be sure not to forget or lose the password. The default factory password is password. A Type passwd. msh> passwd B Type the current password. Old password: C Type the new password. New password: 6 The password must consist of 3 to 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols. Upper and lower case characters are considered unique. For example, R is different from r. The password is the same as that used in the configuration of the Network Interface Board using a Web Browser and that used in the NIB Setup Tool. If you change a password from telnet, the other passwords are also changed. D Type the new password once again. Retype new password: 87

314 Appendix Changing the NetBIOS name Use the hostname command to change the NetBIOS name of the printer. msh> hostname NetBIOS name of the printer The NetBIOS name consists of up to 13 alphanumeric characters. You cannot use a name starting with RNP or rnp. WINS Use the wins command to configure the WINS server. For how to configure the WINS server, see P.105 Configuring a WINS. 6 WINS configuration msh> set wins {on off} on means active and off means inactive. View settings The following command displays the IP addresses of the WINS server. msh> wins Example output: wins: primary server secondary server wins server current config: primary server secondary server hostname abcd ScopeID The current configuration appears on the second line when DHCP is active. When DHCP is not active, there is no second line. If the network boot setting is changed to another from DHCP, the WINS server IP addresses that were saved on the printer may differ from the current IP addresses. Address configuration Specify the WINS server IP addresses. msh> wins {primary secondary} address Use primary to specify the primary WINS server address, and use secondary to specify the secondary WINS server address. 88

315 Remote Maintenance by telnet AutoNet Use the set command to configure AutoNet. msh> set autonet {on off} on means active and off means inactive. Changing the password Use the passwd command to change the remote maintenance password. Important Be sure not to forget or lose the password. The default factory password is password. A Type passwd. msh> passwd B Type the current password. Old password: C Type the new password. New password: 6 The password must consist of 3 to 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols. Upper and lower case characters are considered unique. For example, R is different from r. The password is the same as that used in the configuration of the Network Interface Board using a Web Browser and that used in the NIB Setup Tool. If you change a password from telnet, the other passwords are also changed. D Type the new password once again. Retype new password: 89

316 Appendix SNMP The Network Interface Board functions as a SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) agent using the UDP and IPX protocols. Using the SNMP manager you can get information about the printer. The factory default community names are public and admin. You can get MIB information using these community names. Reference For more information about configuring the community name, see P.84 SN- MP in Remote Maintenance by telnet. Limitation The kinds of supported MIBs differ depending on the printer. 6 Supported MIBs MIB-II PrinterMIB HostResourceMIB RicohPrivateMIB 90

317 Understanding the Displayed Information Understanding the Displayed Information This section describes how to read status information returned by the Network Interface Board. Print Job Information The status of the print job can be viewed using the following commands. telnet : Use the status command. P.83 Printer status Item name ID Source Process Status Time Meaning Print request ID. The name of the host requesting the print job. The type of print command. Status of print job. Active Printing or preparing for printing. Waiting Waiting to be transferred to the printer. The time when the print request was received. 6 Print Log Information This is a record of the most recent ten jobs that have been printed. This log can be displayed with the following commands. telnet : Use the prnlog command. P.83 Printer status Item name ID Source Process Bytes Result Meaning Print request ID. The user name, workstation name or address of the host that sent the print job. The type of print command used. The size of the file in bytes. Communication result. OK Indicates that the print job was completed correctly. NG Indicates that the print job was not completed normally. Canceled rcp, rsh or lpr print commands were stopped. A problem occurred with the printing application. This message doesn't appear when ftp or RPRINTER is used. 91

318 Appendix Item name Time User Code Address Process Print Start Time Print End Time Open Count Eof Count Data Size Meaning The time when the print request was received. The user name, workstation name or address of the host that sent the print job. IP address. The type of print command used. The time the print process was started. The time the print process was completed. The number of print processes that the application made. The reception number of file unit. The number of bytes of received data. Network Statistical Information 6 Use the following command to view Network Interface Board network statistics. Detailed information about the words used to describe the status of the Network Interface Board are described below. telnet : Use the info command. P.83 Printer status Item name System elapsed time Total printing time Total open count Current connection count Total connection count Print error count Access error count Print request full count Meaning The time that has passed since the Network Interface Board started. The total time spent in processing the print data. The total open (printing process) count that the application required. The current number of open connections with the Network Interface Board. The total number of print jobs sent to the Network Interface Board. The number of times the printing process sent an error message. The number of times the connection was refused because of the access control value. The number of times a connection was refused because the number of print requests exceeded the number of allowed sessions. 92

319 Understanding the Displayed Information Configuring the Network Interface Board The Network Interface Board settings can be displayed and confirmed using the commands below. telnet : Use the show command. P.84 Network Interface Board configuration settings information Item name Common Mode Protocol Up/Down AppleTalk TCP/IP NetWare NetBEUI NVRAM version Device name Comment Location Contact Soft switch AppleTalk Mode Net Object Type Zone Meaning Up means active, Down means inactive. Internal version number. AppleTalk protocol in selection. Network number. Macintosh printer name. The type of printer. Name of the zone that the printer belongs to. 6 93

320 Appendix 6 Item name TCP/IP Mode ftp lpr rsh diprint web telnet download npmp snmp ipp wins EncapType Network boot Filter Max DSTs Address Netmask Broadcast Gateway AccessCtrl AccessMask Primary WINS Secondary WINS Time server Home page URL Home page link name Help page URL SNMP protocol Meaning Up means active, Down means inactive. Frame type. Network boot. Internal parameter. IP address. Subnet mask. Broadcast address. Default gateway address. Access control address. Access control mask. Primary WINS server address Secondary WINS server address URL of homepage. URL name of homepage. URL of help page. Protocol used with SNMP. 94

321 Understanding the Displayed Information Item name NetWare Mode EncapType RPRINTER number RPRINTER name Print server name Fileservername Context name Switch Mode NDS/Bindery Packet negotiation Print job timeout NetBEUI Mode Switch Mode Direct print Notification Workgroup name Computer name Comment Share name[1] Shell mode Meaning (this value is fixed) Frame type. Remote printer number. Remote printer name. Print server name. Name of the connect file server. Context of print server. Active mode. (this value is fixed) Time of the job timeout. (this value is fixed) (this value is fixed) (this value is fixed) Notification of print job completion. Name of the workgroup. Name of the computer. Comment. Share name (name of the printer type). Mode of remote maintenance tool. 6 95

322 Appendix Message List This is a list of messages written to the printer's system log. The system log can be viewed using the syslog command. System Log Information You can use the following methods to view the system log. telnet : Use the syslog command. P.84 System log information Message when the Network Interface Board starts or restarts Network Interface Board Ver.x.x.x PRINTER SYSTEM system name Ver.x.x.x The version number of the Network Interface Board. The system name and version of the printer. 6 Attach FileServer= file server name The printer is attached to file server name as the nearest server. Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps The speed of the network (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps). Current IPX address Frametype= frame type name NetBEUI Computer Name= computer name Start httpd Start npmpd for IPX Start npmpd for TCP/IP Start smbd direct print mode(netbeui) Start snmpd Ver.2.0 Vendor=, Country=, Lang= The current IPX address. The "frame type name" is configured to be used on NetWare. The NetBEUI Computer Name is defined as "computer name". The Web server has been started. The npmpd for IPX protocol has been started. The npmpd for TCP/IP protocol has been started. You can print from a client on the Windows network via the print server. The SNMP agent of the displayed version has been started. The vendor, the country code, and the language. 96

323 Message List NetWare (When the Network Interface Board is started) When working as a print server Access to NetWare server file server name denied. Either there is no account for this print server on the NetWare server or the password was incorrect. Attach to print queue print queue name Login to fileserver file server name ( NDS BINDERY ) Open log file file name Printer printer name has no queue Print queue print queue name cannot be serviced by printer 0, print server name The print server received error error number during attempt to log in to the network.access to the network was denied.verify that the print server name and password are correct. When working as a remote printer Cannot log in to the file server. Confirm that the print server is registered on the file server. If a password is specified for the print server, delete it. Attached to the print queue. Logged in to the file server with NDS or BINDERY mode. The specified log file has been opened. The print queue is not assigned to the printer. Using NWAdmin, assign the print queue to the printer, and then restart it. Print services are not available for the print queue. Confirm that the volume of the print queue exists on the specified file server. Cannot log in to the file server. The print server is not registered or the password is specified. Register the print server without specifying a password. 6 Cannot create service connection Cannot find rprinter ( print server name / printer number ) Establish a connection with the print server, print server name No local target for print server name Required file server ( file server name ) not found Required print server ( print server name ) not found Unable to attach to print server ( print server name ) Cannot establish a connection with the file server. Your request may exceed the maximum number of connections that the file server can deal with at a time. The printer having the number displayed on the print server does not exist. Confirm the number of the printer registered to the print server. A connection with the print server has been established. Cannot get routing information about the file server. If a different frame type is configured from that used on the network, you should select "Auto Select" as a frame type. Cannot find the required file server. Cannot find the print server. Confirm the name of the print server. Cannot connect to the print server. The print server refuses a connection for some reason. Confirm the configuration of the print server. 97

324 Appendix NetBEUI (When the Network Interface Board is started) Back to default name (<Computer name>) Print session full Required computer name (<Computer name>) is duplicated name The same computer name is detected on the network. As unable to add computer name to the suffix, Computer name back to default name. Configure a new computer name that is unique. Cannot accept the print session. The same computer name is detected on the network. The start job determines the computer name by adding the computer name to the suffix (0,1...). Configure a new computer name that is unique. 6 TCP/IP When the address is configured Invalid gateway address When using lpr filter data error lost connection print requests full printer permission denied printer refuse The gateway address is not correct for the specified IP address. Some data cannot be handled by the filter option. Confirm the file code and the settings of the filter option. The connection was cut by the other party. Check the printer to which you requested to print. Cannot accept the print request (max. 5 sessions). Confirm the status of the printer with telnet, and print it again after the print request becomes less than 5 sessions. Cannot get permission to use the printer. Confirm the access rights with the access control address and the access control mask. Something is wrong with the printer. Confirm the status of the printer. At the beginning of the message, the IP address of the client is displayed within parentheses. 98

325 Message List When using rsh, rcp, ftp Can't build data connection: message cmd_name:command not supported command line too long file_name:no such file or directory filter data error get log busy lost connection no more ftp execute print requests full printer busy printer permission denied printer refuse Cannot establish a connection for data transfer due to the displayed error. Check the ftp of the workstation that requested the print job, and start it again. When using ftp, this message remains only on the system log information. The remote shell command using cmd-name is not supported. You should use only the print, stat, status, syslog, info, and prnlog commands. You should access the printer only with rsh and rcp remote shell commands. The command line is too long. You must use a file name with the stat, status, syslog, info, prnlog, and install commands. Some of the data cannot be handled with the filter option. Confirm the file code and the settings of the filter option. Another machine is getting the log information. You should get it afterwards. The connection was cut by a counterpart. Check the ftp of the workstation that requested the print job, and start it again. When using ftp, this message remains only on the system log information. More than three users at a time cannot log in using ftp. Since there are three other users that have already logged in, wait until the job is finished. Cannot accept the print request.(max. five sessions) Confirm the status of the printer with lpq, rsh, rcp, and ftp commands, and print it again after the number of print requests (sessions) becomes less than five. Cannot get the printer information. Another user may be accessing it. Wait a few minutes before trying again. Cannot get a permission to use the printer. Confirm the access right with the access control address and the access control mask. Something is wrong with the printer. Confirm the status of the printer. 6 At the beginning of the message, the IP address is displayed in parentheses. 99

326 Appendix 6 When using SNMP Exit snmpd recvfrom:packet discarded,length(reception packet length)> (Packet size),from addr <Address of partner point> session <Community name appointed> not defined snmpin:bad use of session <community Name> from <Address> snmpin:error in snmpdecipher,code (<Error No.>) snmpin:error in snmpservsend,code (<Error No.>) snmpin:pkt too large,code (<Error number>) *1 snmpin:error in sending too large request back,code (<Error number>),giving up *2 snmpin:received bad version The agent is complete. Reset the printer or turn the printer off and on. The received packet was ignored since the length of the packet exceeds the limit. Confirm whether the administration station sent a packet is longer than 1025 bytes. The community name of the received packet is not defined. Confirm that the community name of the administration station is the same as that specified for the printer. The community name of the received packet is not the same as that of the administration station. Confirm the community name specified to the printer. An error occurred with the received packet. Check if the number of the objects sent from the administration station is more than 31 and if there are wrong MIB requests. Cannot send a response packet. Normally, this message is followed by the messages below *1 *2. The response packet to the request is too big to send. Reduce the number of the objects per request. The packet notifying the error is too big to send. Reduce the number of the objects per request. The version of the received packet is invalid. Confirm that the version of the administration station is version-1(0). Error numbers in the messages are codes for internal use. When using DHCP Connected DHCP Server(<IP address assigned by the DHCP server>) Current IP address(<current IP address>) DHCP lease time is infinity Auto-configured IP address(<current IP address>) The IP address is assigned by the DHCP server. This IP address assigned by the DHCP server is used. Lease time of the IP address assigned by the DHCP server is infinity. This IP address assigned by AutoNet is used. 100

327 Message List When using WINS WINS Server=<IP address of the WINS server> NetBIOS Name=<NetBIOS name> WINS server address WINS name registration/refresh error code (Error number) WINS name registration: Server No Response WINS name refresh: Server No Response WINS wrong scopeid Registering the NetBIOS name of the printer with the WINS server is complete. The WINS server IP addresses are not specified. Specify the IP addresses. Cannot register or refresh the NetBIOS name of the printer with a WINS server. Check if the WINS server IP addresses are specified correctly. Confirm that WINS server is available. Configure a new NetBIOS name that is unique. There is no reply on registration or refresh request from the WINS server. Check if the WINS server IP addresses are specified correctly. Confirm that WINS server is available. The wrong scope ID is used. Configure the correct scope ID. The Error number is the number that is sent in response to the WINS server error code

328 Appendix Precautions Please pay attention to the following when using the Network Interface Board. When configuration is necessary, follow the appropriate procedures below. Connecting a Dial Up Router to a Network When the NetWare file server and the printer are on the opposite side of a router, packets are continuously sent back and forth, possibly causing communications charges to increase. Because the packet transmission is a specification of Net- Ware, you need to change the configuration of the router. If the network you are using does not allow you to configure the router, configure the printer. Configuring the router Filter the packets so that they do not pass over the dial up router. 6 The MAC address of the printer doing the filtering is printed on the network configuration page. For more information about printing the network configuration page, see P.108 Network Configuration Page. For more information about configuring the printer if the router cannot be configured, see the instructions below. Configuring the printer with NetWare A Following the setup method in this manual, configure the file server. B Set the frame type for a NetWare environment. Reference For more information about selecting a frame type, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. Configuring the printer without NetWare A While not printing, the Network Interface Board sends packets on the network. Set the NetWare to inactive. Reference For more information about selecting a protocol, see the Setup Guide that comes with this printer. 102

329 Precautions PostScript Printing from Windows When printing PostScript from Windows, see the Operating Instructions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM for how to configure the Network Interface Board and printer driver. NetWare Printing Form Feed You should not configure the form feed on NetWare. The form feed is controlled by the printer driver on Windows. If the NetWare form feed is configured, the printer might not print properly. If you want to change the form feed setting, always configure it on Windows. With Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [Printer Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box. With Windows 2000, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [Neware Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box. With Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [Neware Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box. 6 Banner Page You should not configure a banner page on NetWare. If you want to change the banner page setting, always configure it on Windows. With Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [Printer Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box. With Windows 2000, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [Neware Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box. With Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [Neware Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box. Printing after resetting the printer After resetting the remote printer, it will be cut off from the print server for about seconds before connecting again. Due to the NetWare specification, print jobs may be accepted, but they will not be printed during this interval. When using the printer as a remote printer, wait about 2 minutes after resetting the printer before attempting to print. 103

330 Appendix When Using DHCP the following points when using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Supported systems Windows 2000 Server, Windows NT Server 4.0 and Netware 5 can be configured as a DHCP server. Configure the printer with a reserved IP address To always assign the same IP address, configure a reserved IP address using the DHCP server. 6 When multiple DHCP servers are used, reserve the same address with each DHCP server. The Network Interface Board needs to receive information from the DHCP server that it contacts. Follow these steps to configure the printer with a reserved IP address. A Start the DHCP manager. B Select the scope that will be used, and on the [Scope] menu, click [Reservation]. C Type the IP address into [IP Address]. D Type the MAC address of the Network Interface Board into [Unique Identifier]. Do not use hyphens to separate the numbers. If you do not know the MAC address, it can be found on the network configuration page. P.108 Network Configuration Page E Type a name and comment into the [Client Name] box and the [Client Comment] box. For more information about client names, see P.105 Additional information. F Click [Add]. An IP address is reserved. G Click [Close] to close the dialog box. 104

331 Precautions Additional information When you click [Active Lease] on the [Scope] menu of DHCP manager, a list of client leases appears. When the reserved IP address is not active, the name of the reservation is the name entered in the Client Name field of the Add Reserved Clients dialog box. When the reserved IP address becomes active, the client name changes to the printer name configured by the Network Interface Board. Only the first 13 letters of the printer name appear here. When you use the printer with Multidirect Print, use the host name of the printer as the [Client Properties] Client Properties dialog box. When the DHCP server does not assign an IP address, the Network Interface Board uses as a temporary IP address. You can confirm the printer's IP address on the network configuration page. Because is a special IP address, you cannot print using this address. When using the DHCP relay agent in a network environment that uses a dial up router to connect to the Network Interface Board, an increase in communication fees can occur. Configuring a WINS 6 The printer can be configured to register its NetBIOS name with a WINS server when power is turned on. This enables the NetBIOS name of the printer to be specified from PortNavi and Multidirect Print even under a DHCP environment. This section describes how to configure the WINS server. WINS Server is supported with Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or later, and Windows 2000 Servers WINS Manager. For more information about settings of WINS Server, see Windows Help. If there is no reply from the WINS Server, the NetBIOS name will be registered by broadcast. The NetBIOS name consists of up to 13 alphanumeric characters. Using a WWW browser A Start the Web browser. B Point your browser at the URL or IP address of the printer (e.g. XXX.XXX.XXX substituting the Xs with the IP address). The status of the printer you chose appears on the Web browser. C Click [Configuration]. The dialog box for entering the password and user name is displayed. 105

332 Appendix D Enter your user name and password, and then click [OK]. To use the factory default account, enter no user name and type "password" for the password. E Click [TCP/IP]. F Set [WINS] to active and enter the IP address of the WINS server in [Primary WINS Server] and [Secondary WINS Server]. G Click [Refresh]. H Exit the Web browser. I Restart the printer. Using telnet 6 A Connect to the remote printer using telnet. B Use the "set" command to make WINS active. msh> set wins on C Specify the IP addresses (primary and secondary) using the following commands. msh> wins primary IPaddress msh> wins secondary IPaddress To confirm the current configuration, use the "show" command. D Log out from telnet. E Restart the printer. Using DHCP You can use the printer under a DHCP environment. You can also register the printer NetBIOS name on a WINS server when it is running. Printers that register their NetBIOS name on a WINS server must be configured for the WINS server. Supported DHCP server is Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or later, Windows 2000 Server and NetWare 5. If you do not use WINS server, reserve printer's IP address in DHCP server so that the same IP address is assigned every time. 106

333 Precautions DHCP relay-agent is not supported. If you use DHCP relay-agent on a network via an ISDN line, it will result in expensive line charges. This is because your computer connects to the ISDN line whenever a packet is transferred from the printer. Using AutoNet If the printer IP address is not assigned by a DHCP server automatically, a temporary IP address starting with which is not used on the network can be selected automatically by the printer. The IP address assigned by the DHCP server is given priority to that selected by AutoNet. You can confirm the current IP address on the network configuration page. When AutoNet is running, the NetBIOS name is not registered on the WINS server. When Using the NIB Setup Tool If the Network Interface Board cannot browse using the TCP/IP protocol, confirm that the TCP/IP environment is correctly configured in your computer. 6 When Using IPP with Multidirect Print When using IPP with Multidirect Print, note the following: The network printer can only receive one print job from Multidirect Print at a time. While the network printer is printing a job, another user cannot access the network printer until it completes the job. In this case, Multidirect Print tries to access the network printer until the retry interval expires. If Multidirect Print cannot access the network printer and times out, Multidirect Print stops sending the print job. In this case, you should cancel the paused status from the print queue window. Multidirect Print will resume access the network printer. You can delete the print job from the print queue window, but canceling a print job that has been printed by the network printer might cause that the next print job sent from another user not to be printed correctly. If a print job that is sent from Multidirect Print is interrupted and the network printer cancels the job because something went wrong, launch the print job again. Print jobs sent from another computer do not appear in the print queue window regardless of the protocol. If various users send print jobs using Multidirect Print to network printers, the printing order might not be the order in which the jobs were sent. An IP address cannot be used for the IPP port name because the IP address is used for the PortNavi port name. 107

334 Appendix Network Configuration Page You can confirm the network information on the network configuration page. A Confirm that the printer is online. B Hold down the button on the Network Interface Board for two seconds, and release it. The network configuration page is printed. If you hold down the button for five seconds, the system log information is printed. For more information about the meaning of the data printed, see P.96 System Log Information. When DHCP is active, Current value is displayed as the current configuration * MAC address 2. Printer name 3. TCP/IP IP address Subnet mask Default gateway address Access control address Access control mask Network boot (Command boot) Frame type *: WINS server addresses are displayed when DHCP is active.

335 Precautions 4. NetWare IPX address Frame type Remote printer number Print server name Name of the connect file server Active mode 5. NetBEUI (this value is fixed) Workgroup name Computer name Share name Network path name 6. AppleTalk Network number Macintosh printer name The type of printer Name of the zone that printer belong to 6 109

336 Appendix Specifications 6 LAN interface Frame type 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T EthernetII, IEEE802.2, IEEE802.3, SNAP Protocol TCP/IP Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows NT 4.0 IPX/SPX NetWare 3.12, 3.2, 4.1, 4.11, 5, IntranetWare NetBEUI Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows NT 4.0 IPP Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows NT 4.0 AppleTalk Mac OS SNMP MIB-II, PrinterMIB, HostResourceMIB, RicohPrivateMIB 110

337 INDEX A access control address, 81 access control mask, 81 ARP+PING, 78, 82 AutoNet, 89 B C BOOTP, 82 changing the password, 87 client computer, setup Windows 2000, 29 Windows 95/98/Me, 13 Windows NT 4.0, 46 community name, 85 configuration LPR port printing, Windows NT 4.0, 45 Macintosh, 71 NetWare, 49 NetWare 3.x, 54 NetWare 4.x, 5, 60 Web Browser, 75 Windows 2000, 15 Windows 95/98/Me, 1 Windows NT 4.0, 31 D default gateway address, 81 DHCP, 82, 104 dial up router, 102 E EtherTalk, 71 I L information Network Interface Board configuration, 84, 93 Network Statistics, 92 print job, 91 print log, 91 system log, 84, 96 install Multidirect Print, Windows 2000, 24 Multidirect Print, Windows 95/98/Me, 9 Multidirect Print, Windows NT 4.0, 41 NIB Setup Tool, 49 PortNavi, Windows 2000, 20 PortNavi, Windows 95/98/Me, 5 PortNavi, Windows NT 4.0, 37 IP address, 78, 80 IPP, 86, 107 LAN adapter number (Lana Number), 34 LPR port Printing, 45 M MAC address, 78 Macintosh, 71 message, 96 MIB, 90 Multidirect Print, 107 Windows 2000, 24 Windows 95/98/Me, 9 Windows NT 4.0, 41 Multidirect Print, install Windows 2000, 24 Windows 95/98/Me, 9 Windows NT 4.0, 41 Multidirect Print, printer port Windows 2000, 25 Windows 95/98/Me, 10 Windows NT 4.0, 42 Multidirect Print, uninstall Windows 2000, 25 Windows 95/98/Me, 10 Windows NT 4.0,

338 N NetBIOS name, 88 NetWare, 49 NetWare 3.x, 54 NetWare 4.x, 5, 60 network boot, 82 network configuration page, 108 Network Interface Board Operating Instructions, i NIB Setup Tool, 51 install, 49 install, PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR, 49 precautions, 107 Run NIB Setup Tool, 50 P password, 76, 89 PortNavi Windows 2000, 19 Windows 95/98/Me, 4 Windows NT 4.0, 36 PortNavi, delete the port Windows 2000, 21 Windows 95/98/Me, 6 Windows NT 4.0, 38 PortNavi, install Windows 2000, 20 Windows 95/98/Me, 5 Windows NT 4.0, 37 PortNavi, printer port Windows 2000, 22 Windows 95/98/Me, 7 Windows NT 4.0, 39 PortNavi, uninstall Windows 2000, 21 Windows 95/98/Me, 6 Windows NT 4.0, 38 precautions, 102 printer name, 72 Printer Reference, i printer status, 83 Pure IP, 63 Q R Quick Installation Guide, i RARP+TFTP, 82 remote printer, setup NetWare 3.x, 57 NetWare 4.x, 5, 65 RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions, i S T setup client computer, Windows 2000, 29 client computer, Windows 95/98/Me, 13 client computer, Windows NT 4.0, 46 Setup Guide, i SNMP, 84, 90 specifications, 110 subnet mask, 81 U telnet, 79 uninstall Multidirect Print, Windows 2000, 25 Multidirect Print, Windows 95/98/Me, 10 Multidirect Print, Windows NT 4.0, 42 PortNavi, Windows 2000, 21 PortNavi, Windows 95/98/Me, 6 PortNavi, Windows NT 4.0, 38 UNIX Supplement, i W Z Web Browser, 75 Windows 2000, 15 Windows 95/98/Me, 1 Windows NT 4.0, 31 WINS, 88 WINS Server, 105 zone, EE GB UE USA G063

339 Copyright 2000

340 Network Interface Board Operating Instructions EE GB UE USA G

341 RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions c1-rps-300.tif Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.

342 Introduction To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Please read the Safety Information in the Printer Reference that comes with the printer before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIP- MENT PROBLEMS. Important Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine. Trademarks RICOH-SCRIPT2 is a registered trademark of Ricoh Company. Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe and PostScript are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Apple, Macintosh, TrueType, LaserWriter and ColorSync are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Incorporated. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks. The proper names of Windows operating system are as follows: Microsoft Windows 95 operating system Microsoft Windows 98 operating system Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me) Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system Version 4.0 Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system Version 4.0

343 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury. R CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property. * The statements above are notes for your safety. Important If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating. This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation. Limitation This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together, or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used. Reference This symbol indicates a reference. [ ] Keys that appear on the machine's panel display. Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display. { } Keys built into the machine's operation panel. Keys on the computer's keyboard. i

344 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 95/98/Me... 1 Printer Properties Tabs and Their Settings... 1 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows Printer Properties Tabs and Their Settings... 7 Printing Preferences Tabs and Their Settings... 9 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows NT Printer Properties Tabs and Their Settings Default Document Properties Tabs and Their Settings Windows Network Environment Windows Headers Sending Header Data Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with a Macintosh Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with a Macintosh Option Setup Dialog Setting up for Printing Setting up Print Options Specifying Custom Size Appendix Printer Memory and VM Area Specifications Precautions for RICOH-SCRIPT Difference in Description Other Precautions INDEX ii

345 1. Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 95/98/Me For operation under Windows 95/98/Me, you should install both the Windows 95/98/Me PostScript printer driver and the PPD file. This documentation describes the specific printer functions and menus that are added by installing the PPD file. For details about the functions and menus of the Windows 95/98/Me PostScript printer driver, see the printer driver's Help. Be sure to install the PPD file for Windows 95/98/Me. Do not install the PPD file for Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0 accidentally. Printer Properties Tabs and Their Settings This section describes the Printer Properties tabs and the settings that are specific to this printer. The [General], [Details], [Sharing], and [Color Management] tabs are standard Windows tabs. Reference For more information about these tabs, see the documentation that comes with your Windows operating system. [Paper] tab Paper size Use this to select the size of paper you want to use. Reference For more information about the paper sizes supported by this printer, see P.32 Specifications. Paper source Use this to select the paper tray you want to use. The following items are available: [AutoSelect Tray], [Tray 1], and [Tray 2] (option). If the paper tray you want to use is not available here even though it is physically installed, use the [Device Options] tab to make the printer recognize the tray correctly. P.4 [Device Options] tab 1

346 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows Copies Use this to set the number of copies of a print job. 1 With some applications, the number of copies specified with the application takes priority over the number of copies specified with the printer driver. Custom Select [Custom page] in [Paper size], and then click [Custom]. This will open the [Custom-Defined Size] dialog box where you can set the custom page size. P.3 [Custom-Defined Size] dialog box More Options Click to open the [More Paper Options] dialog box. P.2 [More Paper Options] dialog box You can select the page orientation for duplex printing and the paper type in this dialog box. Limitation Duplex printing is possible only when the PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (option) and the AD390 (duplex unit, option) are installed on the printer. About Click to display the printer driver copyright and version information. [More Paper Options] dialog box Printing on both sides (duplex printing) Use this to set the duplex printing. The following items are available: [None], [Flip on long edge] and [Flip on short edge]. Limitation Duplex printing is possible only when the PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (option) and the AD390 (duplex unit, option) are installed on the printer. You can select long-edge feed or short-edge feed regardless of feed and print direction. Paper type Use this to select the paper type. The following items are available: [Plain Paper], [OHP Transparency], and [Thick Paper]. 2 Selecting [OHP Transparency] as the paper type automatically adjusts internal settings to use a color profile specifically for OHP transparencies. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHPs, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated in any of the dialog boxes. In this case, the Color Profile setting on the [Device Options] tab is not enabled.

347 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 95/98/Me [Custom-Defined Size] dialog box Paper name You can give a name to the custom size paper you are going to define. Width, Length Use these to define the width and length of the custom size paper. 1 Units Select the unit of the width and length; inch or millimeter. When specifying the width and length in millimeter unit, the custom paper size may not be correctly set. Do not turn on [Traverse]. [Graphics] tab Resolution Use this to select the resolution; 600 dpi or 300 dpi. Color control Use this to select whether or not you want the colors in the documents to be adjusted before printing so that the printed page more closely matches the colors on the screen. Halftoning Select the halftone pattern you want to use for printing. The following items are available: [Use printer's settings] and [Use settings below]. You can select [Use settings below], but modifying [Screen frequency:] or [Screen angle:] has no effect on the printing result. Special Use this to control the print image. Selecting a check box changes the icon on the left so that it reflects the option you select. Print as a negative image Select this option to print a negative image, which is produced by replacing the three primary colors with their complementary colors, and by reversing black and white. Using negative image printing to output a color image might produce unexpected results. Print as a mirror image Select this option to print a mirror image of the document by reversing the horizontal coordinates. 3

348 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows Scaling Use this to enlarge or reduce the original document. The range of values can be changed between 25 to 400 %. 1 [Fonts] tab Use this tab to select the TrueType font printing method. If you select [Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the font Substitution Table], you can edit the table. Clicking [Edit the Table] on the [Fonts] tab displays the [Font Substitution Table] dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify which TrueType fonts should be replaced with built-in printer fonts. Using substitute fonts A Open the [Font Substitution Table] dialog box. B In the [For this TrueType font:] list in the upper part of the dialog box, click the TrueType font which you want to use as a substitution font. C Use the [Printer font for:] list box to select the printer font you want to use. D Click [OK]. [Device Options] tab This tab includes settings that should be made after the printer driver is installed. These settings optimize the printer configuration. Available printer memory Shows the amount of memory installed on the printer. You normally do not need to change this setting. Printer features Shows settings that are specific for the printer. These features can be changed using the [Change settings for:] list box. The following is a list of available settings. Auto Tray Switch Turning on this setting tells the printer to automatically switch to the other tray if it has the same paper size as the current tray when paper runs out while printing. Color Mode Use this to set the output color to [Black and White] or [Color]. Gradation Use this to set the printing mode to [Fast] or [Standard]. Color Setting Use this to set the correction method used for the color conversion. The following items are available: [Off] *1, [Vivid] *2, [Super Vivid] *3, [Fine] *4, [Super Fine] *5. *1 No modification to the color setting. *2 Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion with enhanced saturation and brightness to print vivid colors. 4

349 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 95/98/Me *3 Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion. The colors printed with this setting are more vivid than those printed with the [Vivid] setting. All of the colors in the image, especially the lighter ones, are emphasized. *4 Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in color rendering dictionaries, and perform CMYK conversion. It makes it possible to print colors that are close to the displayed colors on the computer screen. The color rendering dictionaries refer to the contents selected by the Color Profile setting. This setting is useful when the application and printer driver do not support the color matching features. *5 Like the [Fine] setting, the color rendering dictionary is used, however, output is more vivid. This setting is enabled to make light colors print more vividly. The color rendering dictionary that is selected in the Color Profile setting is used. Color Profile Use this to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to for color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The CRD you select is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super Fine] is selected for Color Setting. The following items are available: [Photograph] *1, [Presentation] *2, and [Solid Color] *3. When selecting [OHP Transparency] as the paper type, the CRD automatically adjusts to a color profile specifically for OHP transparencies. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHPs, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated on any of the dialog boxes. In this case, this setting is not enabled. *1 Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones. *2 Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of documents that contain text and graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and so on. If you use this CRD for printing photographs, color or gradations might not be reproduced well. *3 Use this setting to print specific colors, logos and so on. Toner Saving Use this to set Toner Saving to [Off] or [On]. Turning on toner saving can cause the output to become blurred and result in very thin lines not printing at all. In the case of color printing, toner saving can cause colors to be different from those expected. Because of this, use toner saving only for proofing and intermediate drafts, and turn it off for final prints when top quality is important. Black Text/Graphics Use this to select the black color mode to [K] or [CMY+K]. If [K] is selected, the black parts of text and graphics are printed with only black toner. Dithering Use this to set the image rendering mode. The following items are available: [Auto], [Photographic], and [Text]. 5 1

350 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 1 Statistics Code Use this to set [On] or [Off]. If [On] is selected, User Code and User ID RPS2 will be fixed. If [Off] is selected, User Code Other and User ID? will be fixed. Reference For more information about User Codes, see the Printer Reference included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Installable options This box shows the options installed in the printer. When selecting an option inside the upper list of this group, its current setting appears in the [Change setting for:] box. The following settings are available: For the optional tray unit: [None], [Tray 2]. For the duplex unit: [Not Installed], [Installed]. For the optional memory unit (VMOption): [32 MB RAM], [64 MB RAM], [96 MB RAM], [128 MB RAM], [160 MB RAM], [192 MB RAM], [256 MB RAM]. [PostScript] tab Use this tab to set the output format of the PostScript files and the data processing method. On the [PostScript] tab, click [Advanced] to display the [Advanced PostScript Options] dialog box. When the printer is connected to the network. Clear both [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job]. When the printer is connected to the computer via a parallel cable. Select both [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job]. Also, confirm that [ASCII data] is selected. If it is not selected, select it. Reference For more information about the network, see P.20 Windows Network Environment. For more information about the PostScript headers, see P.21 Windows Headers. 6

351 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 2000 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 2000 For operation under Windows 2000, you should install both the Windows 2000 PostScript printer driver and the PPD file. This documentation describes the specific printer functions and menus that are added by installing the PPD file. For details about the functions and menus of the Windows 2000 PostScript printer driver, see the printer driver's Help. 1 Limitation Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. When you install a printer driver, log on using an account that has Administrators permission. Be sure to install the PPD file for Windows Do not accidentally install the PPD file for Windows 95/98/Me or Windows NT 4.0. Printer Properties Tabs and Their Settings This section describes the tab settings that are specific to this printer. Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Reference The [General], [Sharing], [Ports], [Advanced], [Color Management] and [Security] tabs are Windows 2000 standard tabs. For more information about these tabs, see the documentation that comes with your Windows operating system. [Device Settings] tab Form to Tray Assignment You normally do not need to change this setting. If the paper tray you want to use is not available here, even though it is physically installed, use [Option Tray] on the [Device Settings] tab to make the printer recognize the tray correctly. Font Substitution Table Use this to edit the TrueType font substitution table. Under [Font Substitution Table], the TrueType fonts installed on the computer are displayed. Select the setting you want to use from the list boxes for each TrueType font. 7

352 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows Available PostScript Memory Shows the amount of memory installed on the printer. You normally do not need to change this setting. 1 You can change this setting by changing the memory setting in [Installable Options]. Send CTRL-D Before Each Job, Send CTRL-D After Each Job When the printer is connected to the network, select [No] for both [Send CTRL- D Before Each Job] and [Send CTRL-D After Each Job] When the printer is connected to the computer via parallel cable, select [Yes] both for [Send CTRL-D Before Each Job] and [Send CTRL-D After Each Job]. Job Timeout Use this to set a job timeout period in the range of 0 to seconds. Setting the value to 0 turns the job timeout off. Wait Timeout Use this to set a wait timeout period in the range of 0 to seconds. Setting the value to 0 turns the wait timeout off. Installable Options Total Printer Memory Use this to select the amount of memory actually installed in the printer. The following items are available: [32 MB], [64 MB], [96 MB], [128 MB], [160 MB], [192 MB] and [256 MB]. Option Tray Use this to select if the optional tray is installed in the printer. The following items are available: [None] and [Tray 2]. Duplex unit When the optional duplex unit is installed to the printer, select [Installed]. If not, select [Not Installed]. 8

353 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 2000 Printing Preferences Tabs and Their Settings Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. General users can change the settings in an application's [Print] dialog box. 1 [Layout] tab Print on Both Sides (Duplex) Use this to set the duplex printing. The following items are available: [None], [Flip on Short Edge] and [Flip on Long Edge]. Limitation Duplex printing is possible only when the PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (option) and the AD390 (duplex unit, option) are installed on the printer. You can select long-edge feed or short-edge feed regardless of feed and print direction. Advanced Click to open the [Advanced Options] dialog box. P.10 [Advanced Options] dialog box [Paper/Quality] tab Tray Selection Paper Source Use this to select the tray from which you want paper to be fed for printing. The following items are available: [Automatically Select], [Tray 1], and [Tray 2] (option). If you cannot select an optional tray even though it is physically installed on the printer, use [Installable Options] on the [Device Settings] tab to correctly set up the option. Media Use this to select the paper type as [Plain Paper], [OHP Transparency], or [Thick Paper]. 9

354 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 1 Selecting [OHP Transparency] as the paper type automatically adjusts internal settings to use a color profile specifically for OHP transparencies. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHPs, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated in any of the dialog boxes. In this case, the Color Profile setting in the [Advanced Options] dialog box is not enabled. Color Use this to set the output color. The following items are available: [Black & White] and [Color]. Some files which include the JPEG, BMP or PSD (Photoshop) data might be printed in color even though Black & White is selected in Color. In this case, if you want to print a whole document in the black & white mode, you must select [Black and White] in Color Mode in the [Advanced Options] dialog box. Advanced Click to open the [Advanced Options] dialog box. P.10 [Advanced Options] dialog box [Advanced Options] dialog box Paper/Output Paper Size Shows the currently selected paper size. You can use the list box to select another paper size if you want. Selecting [PostScript Custom Page Size] opens the [PostScript Custom Page Size Definition] dialog box, where you can specify the width and length of the custom size paper. Graphic You can specify the width and length in inch, millimeter or point unit. When specifying them in millimeter unit, the custom paper size may not be correctly set. Reference For more information about the paper sizes supported by this printer, see P.32 Specifications. Print Quality Use this to select the resolution; 600 dpi or 300 dpi. Image Color Management Use this to set the Image Color Management (ICM). 10

355 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 2000 Scaling Use this to enlarge or reduce the original document. The range of values can be changed between 1 to 1,000 %. TrueType Font Use this to set the TrueType font printing method. Selecting [Substitute with Device Font] causes TrueType fonts to be replaced with the printer's fonts in accordance with the font substitution table. 1 Document Options Auto Tray Switch Turning on this setting tells the printer to automatically switch to the other tray if it has the same paper size as the current tray when paper runs out while printing. Color Mode Use this to set the output color to [Black and White] or [Color]. Gradation Use this to set the printing mode to [Fast] or [Standard]. Color Setting Use this to set the correction method used for the color conversion. The following items are available: [Off] *1, [Vivid] *2, [Super Vivid] *3, [Fine] *4, and [Super Fine] *5. *1 No modification to the color setting. *2 Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion with enhanced saturation and brightness to print vivid colors. *3 Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion. The colors printed with this setting are more vivid than those printed with the [Vivid] setting. All of the colors in the image, especially the lighter ones, are emphasized. *4 Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in color rendering dictionaries, and perform CMYK conversion. It makes it possible to print colors that are close to the displayed colors on the computer screen. The color rendering dictionaries refer to the contents selected by the Color Profile setting. This setting is useful when the application and printer driver do not support the color matching features. *5 Like the [Fine] setting, the color rendering dictionary is used, however, output is more vivid. This setting is enabled to make light colors print more vividly. The color rendering dictionary that is selected in the Color Profile setting is used. Color Profile Use this to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to for color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The CRD you select is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super Fine] is selected for Color Setting. The following items are available: [Photograph] *1, [Presentation] *2, and [Solid Color] *3. 11

356 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 1 When selecting [OHP Transparency] as the paper type, the CRD automatically adjusts to a color profile specifically for OHP transparencies. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHPs, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated on any of the dialog boxes. In this case, this setting is not enabled. *1 Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones. *2 Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of documents that contain text and graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and etc. If you use this CRD for printing photographs, color or gradations might not be reproduced well. *3 Use this setting to print specific colors, logos and so on. Toner Saving Use this to set Toner Saving to [Off] or [On]. Turning on toner saving can cause the output to become blurred and result in very thin lines not printing at all. In the case of color printing, toner saving can cause colors to be different from those expected. Because of this, use toner saving only for proofing and intermediate drafts, and turn it off for final prints when top quality is important. Black Text/Graphics Use this to select the black color mode to [K] or [CMY+K]. If [K] is selected, the black parts of text and graphics are printed with only black toner. Dithering Use this to select the image rendering mode. The following items are available: [Auto], [Photographic] and [Text]. Statistics Code Use this to set [On] or [Off]. If [On] is selected, User Code and User ID RPS2 will be fixed. If [Off] is selected, User Code Other and User ID? will be fixed. Reference For more information about User Codes, see the Printer Reference included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. 12

357 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows NT 4.0 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows NT 4.0 For operation under Windows NT 4.0, you should install both the Windows NT 4.0 PostScript printer driver and the PPD file. This documentation describes the specific printer functions and menus that are added by installing the PPD file. For details about the functions and menus of the Windows NT 4.0 PostScript printer driver, see the printer driver's Help. 1 Limitation Installing a printer driver requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you install a printer driver, log on under Full Control permission. We recommend that you upgrade your Windows NT 4.0 operating system to the latest version before installing the printer driver. Contact your Windows retailer for details about the latest version available. Be sure to install the PPD file for Windows NT 4.0. Do not accidentally install the PPD file for Windows 95/98/Me or Windows Printer Properties Tabs and Their Settings This section describes the tab settings that are specific to this printer. Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Reference The [General], [Port], [Scheduling], [Sharing], and [Security] tabs are Windows NT 4.0 standard tabs. For more information about these tabs, see the documentation that comes with your Windows operating system. [Device Settings] tab The current setting appears in the lower part of the dialog box when you click a setting item. Select the setting you want to use for the selected item. Available PostScript Memory Shows the amount of memory installed on the printer. You normally do not need to change this setting. You can change this setting by changing the memory setting in [Installable Options]. 13

358 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows Halftone Changing this setting will not affect printing result. 1 Halftone Setup Changing this setting will not affect printing result. Form to Tray Assignment You normally do not need to change this setting. If the paper tray you want to use is not available here, even though it is physically installed, use the [Device Settings] tab to make the printer recognize the tray correctly. Font Substitution Table Use this to edit the TrueType font substitution table. Under [Font Substitution Table], the TrueType fonts installed on the computer are displayed. Select the setting you want to use from [Change Setting] for each TrueType font. Job Timeout Use this to set a job timeout period in the range of 0 to seconds. Setting the value to 0 turns the job timeout off. Wait Timeout Use this to set a wait timeout period in the range of 0 to seconds. Setting the value to 0 turns the wait timeout off. Total Printer Memory Use this to select the amount of memory actually installed in the printer. The following items are available: [32 MB], [64 MB], [96 MB], [128 MB], [160 MB], [192 MB] and [256 MB]. Option Tray Use this to select if the optional tray is installed in the printer. The following items are available: [None] and [Tray 2]. Duplex Unit When the optional duplex unit is installed to the printer, select [Installed]. If not, select [Not Installed]. 14

359 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows NT 4.0 Default Document Properties Tabs and Their Settings Limitation Changing the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. General users can change the settings in an application's [Print] dialog box. 1 [Page Setup] tab Page Size Shows the currently selected paper size. You can use the list box to select another paper size if you want. All paper sizes that can be used with Windows NT 4.0 are displayed, however, only the paper sizes supported by the printer can be selected. For more information about the paper sizes supported by this printer, see P.32 Specifications. With Windows NT 4.0, custom paper size cannot be defined. Paper Source Use this to select the tray from which you want paper to be fed for printing. The following items are available: [Automatically Select], [Tray 1] and [Tray 2] (option). If you cannot select an optional tray even though it is physically installed on the printer, use [Option Tray] on the [Device Settings] tab to correctly set up the option. Copy Count Use this to set the number of copies of a print job. Important With some applications, the number of copies specified with the application takes priority over the number of copies specified with the printer driver. Orientation Use this to select how the document is positioned on the page. The following items are available: [Portrait], [Landscape], and [Rotated]. Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing) Use this to set the duplex printing. The following items are available: [None], [Short Side], and [Long Side]. 15

360 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 1 Limitation Duplex printing is possible only when the PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (option) and the AD390 (duplex unit, option) are installed to the printer. You can select long-edge feed or short-edge feed regardless of feed and print direction. Color Appearance Use this to set the output color. The following items are available: [Gray Scale] and [Color]. Some files which include the JPEG, BMP or PSD (Photoshop) data might be printed in color even though Grayscale is selected in Color Appearance. In this case, if you want to print a whole document in the grayscale mode, you must select [Black and White] in [Change 'Color Mode' Setting] on the [Advanced] tab. [Advanced] tab The current setting appears in the lower part of the dialog box by clicking a setting item. Select the setting you want to make for the selected item. Paper/Output Paper Source Use this to select the tray from which you want paper to be fed for printing. The following items are available: [Automatically Select], [Tray 1], and [Tray 2] (option). Graphic If you cannot select an optional tray even though it is physically installed on the printer, use [Installable Options] on the [Device Settings] tab to correctly set up the option. Resolution Use this to select the resolution; 600 dpi or 300 dpi. Color Appearance Use this to set the output color. The following items are available: [Gray Scale] and [Color]. 16 Some files which include the JPEG, BMP or PSD (Photoshop) data might be printed in color even though Grayscale is selected in Color Appearance. In this case, if you want to print a whole document in the grayscale mode, you must select [Black and White] in [Change 'Color Mode' Setting] on the [Advanced] tab.

361 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows NT 4.0 Scaling Use this to enlarge or reduce the original document. The range of values can be changed between 1 to 1,000 % TrueType Font Use this to set the TrueType font printing method. Selecting [Substitute with Device Font] causes TrueType fonts to be replaced with the printer's fonts in accordance with the font substitution table. 1 Document Options Mirrored Output Select this option to print a mirror image of the document by reversing the horizontal coordinates. Negative Output Select this option to print a negative image, which is produced by replacing the three primary colors with their complementary colors, and by reversing black and white. Using negative image printing to output a color image might produce unexpected results. Send CTRL-D Before Each Job and Send CTRL-D After Each Job When the printer is connected to the network, select [No] for both [Send CTRL-D Before Each Job] and [Send CTRL-D After Each Job] When the printer is connected to the computer via parallel cable, select [Yes] both for [Send CTRL-D Before Each Job] and [Send CTRL-D After Each Job]. Halftone Color Adjustment Changing this setting will not affect printing result. Printer Features Auto Tray Switch Turning on this setting tells the printer to automatically switch to the other tray if it has the same paper size as the current tray when paper runs out while printing. Color Mode Use this to set the output color to [Black and White] or [Color]. Gradation Use this to set the number of colors used per dot to [Fast] or [Standard]. Color Setting Use this to set the correction method used for the color conversion. The following items are available: [Off] *1, [Vivid] *2, [Super Vivid] *3, [Fine] *4, and [Super Fine] *5. *1 No modification to the color setting. *2 Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion with enhanced saturation and brightness to print vivid colors. 17

362 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 1 *3 Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion. The colors printed with this setting are more vivid than those printed with the [Vivid] setting. All of the colors in the image, especially the lighter ones, are emphasized. *4 Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in color rendering dictionaries, and perform CMYK conversion. It makes it possible to print colors that are close to the displayed colors on the computer screen. The color rendering dictionaries refer to the contents selected by the Color Profile setting. This setting is useful when the application and printer driver do not support the color matching features. *5 Like the [Fine] setting, the color rendering dictionary is used, however, output is more vivid. This setting is enabled to make light colors print more vividly. The color rendering dictionary that is selected in the Color Profile setting is used. Color Profile Use this to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to for color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The CRD you select is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super Fine] is selected for Color Setting. The following items are available: [Photograph] *1, [Presentation] *2, and [Solid Color] *3. When selecting [OHP Transparency] as the paper type, the CRD automatically adjusts to a color profile specifically for OHP. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHP, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated on any of the dialog boxes. In this case, this setting is not enabled. *1 Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones. *2 Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of documents that contain text and graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and etc. If you use this CRD for printing photographs, color or gradations might not be reproduced well. *3 Use this setting to print specific colors, logos and so on. Toner Saving Use this to set Toner Saving to [On] or [Off]. Turning on toner saving can cause the output to become blurred and result in very thin lines not printing at all. In the case of color printing, toner saving can cause colors to be different from those expected. Because of this, use toner saving only for proofing and intermediate drafts, and turn it off for final prints when top quality is important. Black Text/Graphics Use this to select the black color mode to [K] or [CMY+K]. If [K] is selected, the black parts of text and graphics are printed with only black toner. 18

363 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows NT 4.0 Dithering Use this to select the image rendering mode. The following items are available: [Auto], [Photographic], and [Text]. Paper Type Use this to select the paper type as [Plain Paper], [OHP Transparency] or [Thick Paper]. 1 Selecting [OHP Transparency] as the paper type automatically adjusts internal settings to use a color profile specifically for OHP transparencies. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHPs, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated in any of the dialog boxes. In this case, the Color Profile setting on the [Advanced] tab is not enabled. Statistics Code Use this to set [On] or [Off]. If [On] is selected, User Code and User ID RPS2 will be fixed. If [Off] is selected, User Code Other and User ID? will be fixed. Reference For more information about User Codes, see the Printer Reference included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. [Paper Size], [Paper Source], [Copy Count], and [Color Appearance] settings are linked to the settings on the [Page Setup] tab. 19

364 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows Windows Network Environment 1 PostScript data sent to the printer is processed by an interpreter. The interpreter translates programs written in the ASCII code line-by-line into a form that can be recognized by the printer. When the printer is connected to the computer via a parallel cable, PostScript data is processed in units called jobs, and each job should have an EOF (End Of File = Ctrl+D) to indicate the end of the data to the printer. The printer continues to perform processing with the interpreter until receiving the EOF. When the printer is connected to a network, and since the network protocol controls the transferred data of jobs, the EOF is not required. Be sure to turn off the EOF. Windows 95/98/Me Open the [PostScript] tab on the Printer Properties. Then click [Advanced]. Click to clear [Send CTRL+D after job] and [Send CTRL+D before job]. Windows 2000 Open the [Device Settings] tab on the Printer Properties. Select [No] for both [Send CTRL+D after job] and [Send CTRL+D before job]. Windows NT 4.0 Open the [Advanced] tab on the Default Document Properties. Under [Post- Script Options], select [No] for both [Send CTRL-D After Each Job] and [Send CTRL- D Before Each Job]. 20

365 Windows Headers Windows Headers Headers are appended to the print data and contain RICOH-SCRIPT2 commands required for proper printing. The default setting appends the headers to the data automatically for each print job so you can print without worrying about the header data. You can configure how header data is sent to the printer with Windows 95/98/Me. 1 Important Changing header settings should be performed by system administrators who are familiar with the functions of PostScript. Sending Header Data There are two methods for sending header data. Send header data for each print job (default) Use this setting when printing data to a file and when printing to a shared network printer. Select [Download header with each print job] on the [PostScript] tab to enable this method. Send header to printer only once This setting causes the header data to be stored in the printer memory, so jobs sent after the header data has already been sent are printed more quickly. Select [Assume header is downloaded and retained] on the [PostScript] tab to enable this method. To use this setting, you should send the header data to the printer in advance, so click [Send Header Now]. Header data in the printer memory is cleared whenever the printer power is turned off, the printer is reset, or you switch to another type of the printer language. Printing without header data results in an error, so be careful when sending header data individually. When the header data is sent to the printer, a message to inform you that the header has been sent is printed. If you send a print job to the printer without the header, a message to inform you to send the header is printed. In this case, select [Assume header is downloaded and retained], or [Send Header Now] to send the header data to the printer. If the header has already been stored in the printer memory, a message is printed informing you that it has been stored. 21

366 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with Windows 1 22

367 2. Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with a Macintosh Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with a Macintosh You can use the LaserWriter printer driver that comes with your Macintosh when printing. However, if you use the LaserWriter driver alone, you lose some printer functions. The lost printer functions can be added by installing the PPD file. This documentation describes the specific printer functions and menus that are added by installing the PPD file. For details about the functions and menus of the LaserWriter printer driver, see the printer driver's Help. Option Setup Dialog Be sure to configure the options correctly. If not configured correctly, options will not be available even though they are physically installed to the printer. If you do not know the amount of memory you need to select here, print a configuration page, which shows how much memory is currently installed to the printer. P.31 Printer Memory and VM Area Total Printer Memory Use this to select the amount of memory actually installed in the printer. The following items are available: [32 MB], [64 MB], [96 MB], [128 MB], [160 MB], [192 MB] and [256 MB]. Option Tray Use this to select if the optional tray is installed in the printer. The following items are available: [None] and [Tray 2]. Duplex Unit When the optional duplex unit is installed to the printer, select [Installed]. If not, select [Not Installed]. 23

368 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with a Macintosh Setting up for Printing Setting up Print Options 2 LaserWriter 8.3x or earlier With the LaserWriter 8.3x or earlier driver, clicking [Options] on the [Printer] dialog box displays the settings specific to is printer. Selecting [Printer's Default] returns settings to their default values set from the printer operation panel. Reference For more information about the LaserWriter 8.3x or earlier, see the documentation that comes with your Macintosh. 24 Clicking [Option] in the [Printer] dialog box shows the following items: Resolution Use this to select the resolution; 600 dpi or 300 dpi. Auto Tray Switching Turning on this setting tells the printer to automatically switch to the other tray if it has the same size of paper as the current tray when paper runs out while printing. Color Mode Use this to set the output color to [Color] or [Black and White]. Gradation Use this to set the number of colors used per dot to [Fast] or [Standard]. Color Setting Use this to set the correction method used for the color conversion. The following items are available: [Off] *1, [Vivid] *2, [Super Vivid] *3, [Fine] *4, and [Super Fine] *5. *1 No modification to the color setting. *2 Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion with enhanced saturation and brightness to print vivid colors. *3 Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion. The colors printed with this setting are more vivid than those printed with the [Vivid] setting. All of the colors in the image, especially the lighter ones, are emphasized. *4 Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in color rendering dictionaries, and perform CMYK conversion. It makes it possible to print colors that are close to the displayed colors on the computer screen. The color rendering dictionaries refer to the contents selected by the Color Profile setting. This setting is useful when the application and printer driver do not support the color matching features. *5 Like the [Fine] setting, the color rendering dictionary is used, however, output is more vivid. This setting is enabled to make light colors print more vividly

369 Setting up for Printing The color rendering dictionary that is selected in the Color Profile setting is used. Color Profile Use this to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to for color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The CRD you select is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super Fine] is selected for Color Setting. The following items are available: [Photograph] *1, [Presentation] *2, and [Solid Color] *3. 2 When selecting [OHP Transparency] as the paper type, the CRD automatically adjusts to a color profile specifically for OHP transparencies. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHPs, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated on any of the dialog boxes. In this case, this setting is not enabled. *1 Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones. *2 Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of documents that contain text and graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and etc. If you use this CRD for printing photographs, color or gradations might not be reproduced well. *3 Use this setting to print specific colors, logos and so on. Toner Saving Use this to set Toner Saving [On] or [Off]. Turning on toner saving can cause the output to become blurred and result in very thin lines not printing at all. In the case of color printing, toner saving can cause colors to be different from those expected. Because of this, use toner saving only for proofing and intermediate drafts, and turn it off for final prints when top quality is important. Black Text/Graphics Use this to select the black color mode to [K] or [CMY+K]. If [K] is selected, the black parts of text and graphics are printed with only black toner. Dithering Use this to select the image rendering mode. The following items are available: [Auto], [Photographic], and[text]. Paper Type Use this to select the paper type. The following items are available: [Plain Paper], [OHP Transparency], and [Thick Paper]. 25

370 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with a Macintosh 2 Selecting [OHP Transparency] as the paper type automatically adjusts internal settings to use a color profile specifically for OHP transparencies. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHPs, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated in any of the dialog boxes. In this case, the Color Profile setting on [Option] is not enabled. Duplex Use this to set the duplex printing. The following items are available: [Off], [Short Edge] and [Long Edge]. Limitation Duplex printing is possible only when the PAPER FEED UNIT Type206 (option) and the AD390 (duplex unit, option) are installed on the printer. You can select long-edge feed or short-edge feed regardless of feed and print direction. Statistics Code Use this to set [On] or [Off]. If [On] is selected, User Code and User ID RPS2 will be fixed. If [Off] is selected, User Code Other and User ID? will be fixed. Reference For more information about User Codes, see the Printer Reference included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. LaserWriter 8.4x or later The following describes the settings specific to this printer using LaserWriter 8.4x or later. Reference For more information about LaserWriter 8.4x or later, see the documentation that comes with your Macintosh. Selecting [Color Matching] in the [Printer] dialog box shows the following items: Print Color You can specify the method and the color conversion settings for printing. The following items are available. [Black and White] Select this for monochrome printing. [Color/GrayScale] If you select this item, the color profile you select in Color Profile of [Printer Specific Options] becomes effective. 26

371 Setting up for Printing [ColorSync Color Matching] If you select [ColorSync Color Matching], [Printer Profile] becomes active in the same dialog box. Select the ColorSync profile specific for the printer. Macintosh converts the print data from RGB to CMYK data, and sends it to the printer. [PostScript Color Matching]. If you select [PostScript Color Matching], [Printer Profile] becomes active in the same dialog box. Select the ColorSync profile specific for your printer. Your Macintosh prepares the color rendering dictionary (CRD) based on the selected profile and attaches the CRD to the print data. The print data is sent to the printer with the CRD. The printer converts the print data from RGB to CMYK based on the attached the CRD. The CRD is referred to for color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The CRD you select is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super Fine] is selected for Color Setting. 2 Selecting [Error Handling] in the [Printer] dialog box shows the following items: If there is a PostScript error You can select [No special report], [Summarize on screen], or [Print detailed report]. If the cassette is out of paper You can use this setting to select auto tray switching, which tells the printer to automatically switch to the other tray if it has the same paper size as the current tray when paper runs out while printing. Selecting [Printer Specific Options] and [Printer Specific Options 1] in the [Printer] dialog box shows the following items: Resolution Use this to select the resolution; 600 dpi or 300 dpi. Color Mode Use this to set the output color to [Color] or [Black and White]. Gradation Use this to set the number of colors used per dot to [Fast] or [Standard]. Color Setting Use this to set the correction method used for the color conversion. The following items are available: [Off] *1, [Vivid] *2, [Super Vivid] *3, [Fine] *4, and [Super Fine] *5. *1 No modification to the color setting. *2 Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion with enhanced saturation and brightness to print vivid colors. *3 Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion. The colors printed with this setting are more vivid than those printed with the [Vivid] setting. All of the colors in the image, especially the lighter ones, are emphasized. 27

372 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with a Macintosh 2 *4 Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in color rendering dictionaries, and perform CMYK conversion. It makes it possible to print colors that are close to the displayed colors on the computer screen. The color rendering dictionaries refer to the contents selected by the Color Profile setting. This setting is useful when the application and printer driver do not support the color matching features. *5 Like the [Fine] setting, the color rendering dictionary is used, however, output is more vivid. This setting is enabled to make light colors print more vividly. The color rendering dictionary that is selected in the Color Profile setting is used. Color Profile Use this to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to for color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The CRD you select is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super Fine] is selected for Color Setting. The following items are available: [Photograph] *1, [Presentation] *2, and [Solid Color] *3. When selecting [OHP Transparency] as the paper type, the CRD automatically adjusts to a color profile specifically for OHP transparencies. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHPs, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated on any of the dialog boxes. In this case, this setting is not enabled. *1 Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones. *2 Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of documents that contain text and graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and so on. If you use this CRD for printing photographs, color or gradations might not be reproduced well. *3 Use this setting to print specific colors, logos and so on. Toner Saving Use this to set Toner Saving to [On] or [Off]. Turning on toner saving can cause the output to become blurred and result in very thin lines not printing at all. In the case of color printing, toner saving can cause colors to be different from those expected. Because of this, use toner saving only for proofing and intermediate drafts, and turn it off for final prints when top quality is important. Black Text/Graphics Use this to select the black color mode to [K] or [CMY+K]. If [K] is selected, the black parts of text and graphics are printed with only black toner. 28

373 Setting up for Printing Dithering Use this to select the image rendering mode. The following items are available: [Auto], [Photographic], and [Text]. When you use the printer that does not support [Auto], the default setting is [Photographic]. Paper Type Use this to select the paper type. The following items are available: [Plain Paper], [OHP Transparency], and [Thick Paper]. 2 Selecting [OHP Transparency] as the paper type automatically adjusts internal settings to use a color profile specifically for OHP transparencies. Even though the color profile has been optimized for OHPs, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated in any of the dialog boxes. In this case, the Color Profile setting on [Printer Specific Option] is not enabled. Statistics Code Use this to set [On] or [Off]. If [On] is selected, User Code and User ID RPS2 will be fixed. If [Off] is selected, User Code Other and User ID? will be fixed. Reference For more information about User Codes, see the Printer Reference included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Specifying Custom Size With LaserWriter or later, you can specify a custom size. Select [Custom Paper Size] from the popup menu at the top left corner on the [Page Setup] dialog box, and then click [New]. In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the custom size paper, width and height of the paper, and then click [OK]. 29

374 Using RICOH-SCRIPT2 with a Macintosh 2 30

375 3. Appendix Printer Memory and VM Area The following table shows the relationship between the printer memory capacity and the VM (Virtual Memory) capacity. Printer Memory VM (Virtual Memory) Capacity 32 MB Approximately 7.7 MB 64 MB Approximately 9.6 MB 96 MB Approximately 9.6 MB 128 MB Approximately 9.6 MB 160 MB Approximately 9.6 MB 192 MB Approximately 9.6 MB 256 MB Approximately 9.6 MB The VM of the PostScript printer is the memory area outside of the page memory and program area. If the data sent from the computer is very complex, printing may not be possible because of insufficient printer memory. This is called a VM error. In some cases, printing is impossible even though a VM error has not occurred. 31

376 Appendix Specifications Supported paper sizes 3 Paper sizes Printer driver settings A4 A4 B5 JIS B5 (JIS) A5 -A5 Legal (8 1 / 2 " 14") Legal Letter (8 1 / 2 " 11") Letter Executive (7 1 / 4 " 10 1 / 2 ") 7.25x10.5 F (8" 13") -8x13 Folio (8 1 / 4 " 13") -8.25x13 Foolscap (8 1 / 2 " 13") -8.5x13 Com10 Env -Com10 Env DL Env -DL Env A4 Small *1 A4 Small Letter Small *1 Letter Small Legal Small *1 Legal Small *1 The printer supports printing on print area such as A4 Small, Letter Small and Legal Small when printing from a Macintosh, only with specific versions of the driver. Printing with Laser Writer 8.4x (or later) driver supports printing on both standard and small print area. However, with Laser Writer 8.3x (or earlier), the small print area options are not displayed. 32

377 Precautions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 Precautions for RICOH-SCRIPT2 Difference in Description The differences between RICOH-SCRIPT2 and PostScript Level 2 as defined in the PostScript Language Reference Manual, Second Edition by Adobe Systems Incorporated are described below. RICOH-SCRIPT2 does not support the user path cache function, therefore the print processing speed may be reduced when this function is called by any PostScript program. This function originated in Display PostScript, and it is not used by most printer drivers. RICOH-SCRIPT2 does not support automatic garbage collection. Instead, a similar routine is implemented by the printer drivers with the save/restore operators. Not having this function does not create any problems. 3 Other Precautions Because of the differences in image, graphics, and clipping rules, the printing results produced by any single draw operator might be out of place by one dot. The free memory space used for downloading fonts may not be sufficient. A VM error might occur when downloading fonts with insufficient VM memory. In this case, the print job may be canceled. However, this printer will restart RICOH-SCRIPT2 automatically. Lasertalk version 1.3 is not supported. Built-in font metric data may be different from the PostScript fonts. Type 1 fonts conform to the Adobe Type 1 font format (1.1) standard. However, some Type 1 fonts with outline transposition (self-interference) may not print correctly. When printing text without using font hint data downloaded from the application, enlarged or reduced fonts may print incorrectly. When using the PostScript printer driver with Windows applications, the printed result might not match the preview on the computer screen. 33

378 INDEX A About, 2 Advanced, 9, 10 Advanced Options dialog box, 10 Advanced PostScript Options, 6 Advanced tab, 16 Auto Tray Switch, 4, 11, 17 Auto Tray Switching, 24 Available PostScript Memory, 8, 13 Available printer memory, 4 B C Black Text/Graphics, 5, 12, 18, 25, 28 Color, 10 Color Appearance, 16 Color control, 3 Color Mode, 4, 11, 17, 24, 27 Color Profile, 5, 11, 18, 25, 28 Color Setting, 4, 11, 17, 24, 27 Copies, 2 Copy Count, 15 Custom, 2 Custom-Defined Size dialog box, 3 D Device Options tab, 4 Device Settings tab, 7, 13 Dithering, 5, 12, 19, 25, 29 Document Options, 11, 17 Duplex, 26 Duplex Unit, 14, 23 E F EOF, 20 Fonts tab, 4 Font Substitution Table, 4, 7, 14 Form to Tray Assignment, 7, 14 G Gradation, 4, 17, 24, 27 Graphic, 10, 16 Graphics tab, 3 H I J L Halftone, 14 Halftone Color Adjustment, 17 Halftone Setup, 14 Halftoning, 3 header, 21 Image Color Management, 10 Installable Options, 8 Installable options, 6 Job Timeout, 8, 14 LaserWriter, 24, 26 LaserWriter 8.3x or earlier, 24 LaserWriter 8.4x or later, 26 Layout tab, 9 M Mirrored Output, 17 More Options, 2 More Paper Options dialog box, 2 N O Negative Output, 17 Option Setup Dialog, 23 Option Tray, 14, 23 Orientation, 15 34

379 P Page Setup tab, 15 Page Size, 15 Paper name, 3 Paper/Output, 10, 16 Paper/Quality tab, 9 Paper Size, 10 Paper size, 1 Paper Source, 15 Paper source, 1 Paper tab, 1 Paper Type, 19, 25, 29 Paper type, 2 PostScript tab, 6 Print as a mirror image, 3 Print as a negative image, 3 Print Color, 26 Printer Features, 17 Printer features, 4 Printing on both sides (duplex printing), 2 Print on Both Sides (Duplex), 9 Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing), 15 Print Quality, 10 R Resolution, 3, 16, 24, 27 U V W Units, 3 VM area, 31 Wait Timeout, 8, 14 Width, Length, 3 Windows 2000 Advanced Options dialog box, 10 Layout tab, 9 Paper/Quality tab, 9 Windows 95/98 Device Options tab, 4 Fonts tab, 4 Graphics tab, 3 Paper tab, 1 PostScript tab, 6 Windows 2000 Device Settings tab, 7 Windows NT 4.0 Advanced tab, 16 Device Settings tab, 13 Page Setup tab, 15 S Scaling, 4, 11, 17 Send CTRL-D After Each Job, 8, 17 Send CTRL-D Before Each Job, 8, 17 Special, 3 Specifying Custom Size, 29 Statistics Code User Code, User ID, 6, 12, 19, 26, 29 T Toner Saving, 5, 12, 18, 25, 28 Total Printer Memory, 14, 23 Tray Selection, 9 TrueType Font, 11, 17 35

380 MEMO 36 EE GB UE USA G063

381 Copyright 2000

382 RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions EE GB UE USA G

383 UNIX Supplement c1-network-300.tif Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.

384 Introduction To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Please read the Safety Information in the Printer Reference before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS. Further Information Please consult your authorized reseller concerning additional UNIX support. Important Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine. Trademarks PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. Sun, SunOS, Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries. HP-UX is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. LINUX is a trademark of Linus Torvalds. RED HAT is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.

385 Manuals for This Printer There are six manuals that separately describe the procedures for the installation of a printer and for the operation and maintenance of the printer and its optional equipment. To enhance safe and efficient operation of your printer, all users should read and follow the instructions contained in the following manuals. Quick Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installing the printer. Setup Guide Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about installing and setting up the printer and its options. This guide is provided as a printed manual, and also as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. Printer Reference Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about using the printer and its options. The manual is included as a PDF file on the CD- ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions Describes the menus and features you can set using the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver. The manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. Network Interface Board Operating Instructions Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about setting up and using the printer in a network environment. The manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. UNIX Supplement Provides information about setting up and using the printer in a UNIX environment. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities (this manual). i

386 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury. R CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property. * The statements above are notes for your safety. Important If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating. This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation. Limitation This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together, or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used. Reference This symbol indicates a reference. [ ] Keys that appear on the machine's panel display. Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display. { } Keys built into the machine's operation panel. Keys on the computer's keyboard. ii

387 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.UNIX Configuration Using the Installation Shell Script... 1 Assigning the IP Address... 1 Executing the Installation Shell Script... 2 Setup... 6 Printing Method Printing with lpr, lp Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp Printer Status Viewing the Print Job Status with lpq and lpstat Viewing the Printer Status with rsh and ftp Copying Information to a File INDEX iii

388 iv

389 1. UNIX Configuration This section explains how to set up a network printer and check the print status using UNIX. Limitation To print from a UNIX workstation, use the file that the printer supports. This printer does not print ASCII text data. To print ASCII text data, convert them to PostScript data so that the printer can print the converted data. Using the Installation Shell Script The installation shell script helps with the setup process. The installation shell script automates some of the tasks in configuring /etc/hosts, /etc/printcap, and in creating the spool directory for BSD UNIX, and in running lpadmin command for System V UNIX. Preparation The installation shell script can be used on the following three kinds of the workstations. Do not use this installation shell script with other types of workstations. Solaris 2.5.1, 2.6, 7, 8 HP-UX 8.x, 9.x, 10.x, 11.0 Red Hat Linux 6.x, 7 When you use NIS (Network Information Service) or DNS, you should configure the server before running this installation shell script. For more information about the configuration utility of your OS, see the manual that came with the utility. Assigning the IP Address Preparation Configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol. Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol on the printer is set to be active. (The factory default is active.) Assign an IP address to the printer and configure the other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol. Reference For more information about how to make above settings, see the Setup Guide that comes with the printer. 1

390 UNIX Configuration Confirming the IP address 1 Follow the procedure below to confirm that the IP address has been configured correctly. Following procedure uses sample IP address: A Enter the following: # ping If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears is alive If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears. no answer from When you use NIS, the IP address and host name are written to /etc/hosts on the master server. When you use DNS, the information is written to a data file on the name server. After writing the host name and IP address to the file, confirm the configuration by pinging the host name. # ping host_name If the host name is registered with an IP address, the server can access the printer using its host name instead of its IP address. Executing the Installation Shell Script After having configured the printer IP address, follow the procedure below to execute the installation shell script and set up the workstation printing environment. Preparation Before executing the installation shell script, the IP address, the host name and the printer name must be required. Following procedures use sample IP address: , sample host name: nphost and sample printer name: np. Use ftp to get the installation shell script from the printer. A Log on to the workstation as root. If you do not log on as root, the installation shell script will not run. 2

391 Using the Installation Shell Script B Get the installation shell script from the printer. A Move to the directory you want to copy the installation shell script to. B Use ftp to connect to the printer with the IP address that you just configured. # ftp Connected to printer FTP server ready. name ( :root:) C When a user name is requested, ignore and press the {RETURN} key. 331 Password required for root. Password: D When a password is requested, ignore and press the {RETURN} key. 230 User root logged in. ftp> E Type the following to get the installation shell script. ftp> get install F Close the ftp session. ftp> bye 221 Goodbye. # C Run the installation shell script. # sh./install 1 Insert a period and slash before the current directory. D Enter a number to select the workstation OS that you are using. Network printer install shell Copyright RICOH CO.,LTD Select your workstation OS type. 1. SunOS 4.x.x 2. Solaris 2.x, Solaris 7-8 (SunOS5.x) 3. HP-UX 8.x,9.x,10.x,11.x 4. UnixWare 5. Linux 6. other Enter <1-6>: 2 SunOS and UnixWare appear on the screen, but they are not supported. Use Solaris, HP-UX or Linux. If you select 6, the installation shell script exits. 3

392 UNIX Configuration 1 E Enter the IP address of the printer. Enter Printer host IP address <xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx> [return=skip]: The IP address will be added to the /etc/hosts file. If the host name of the printer has already been configured, ignore and press the {RETURN} key. Nothing is added to the /etc/hosts file. F Enter the host name of the printer. Enter Printer host name : nphost The host name will be added to the /etc/hosts file. If no IP address was entered in step E, nothing is added to the /etc/hosts file. G Configure the printer name. Enter logical printer name [default nphost_prn] If you want to use the default name, press the {RETURN} key. If you want to change this name, enter a new name. The host name entered in step F followed by _prn appears in default. H Set the print option. Enter remote printer name [default lp]: Press the {RETURN} key. Setup with the installation shell script is finished. If you enter the IP address in step E, the following message appears. hosts file is modified I Make a test print to confirm that the settings are correct. # lpr -Pnp file_name # lp -d np file_name For more information about lpr and lp, see P.10 Printing Method. 4

393 Using the Installation Shell Script Deleting the printer BSD UNIX workstation, Linux Delete the printer entry from /etc/printcap. Solaris, HP-UX Delete the printer entry. A Stop the scheduler. # /usr/sbin/lpshut B Delete the printer. # /usr/sbin/lpadmin -x printer_name C Restart the scheduler. # /usr/lib/lpsched 1 5

394 UNIX Configuration Setup 1 The printing environment is set up automatically when the installation shell script is executed. This section describes the set up contents when the installation shell script is executed under Red Hat Linux, Solaris and HP-UX. Linux Adding the IP address and host name to the /etc/hosts file The following line is added to the /etc/hosts file nphost # Network Printer is the IP address, nphost is the host name, from # to the end of the line is a comment. The /etc/hosts file contains a list of the IP addresses and their host names of all of the hosts communicating on the network. Each entry is delimited with a space or a tab, and each line is separated with a return. If you do not use NIS or DNS, you must manually enter the IP address and host name of each workstation using the network printer in the /etc/hosts file. Adding an entry to the /etc/printcap file The following entry is added to the /etc/printcap file. This is the configuration for printing with the lpr command. In order to use the lpr command to print, you need to edit the /etc/hosts file, add an entry for the network printer to the /etc/printcap file and create a spool directory. ##PRINTTOOL3## REMOTE np Network Printer:\ :rm=nphost:\ :rp=lp:\ :sd=/var/spool/lpd/npd:\ :lf=/var/log/npd-errs:\ :sh:\ :mx#0: The /etc/printcap file is used to register the name and attributes of a printer. You must make an entry for the network printer in the /etc/printcap file of all workstations using the network printer. Each entry is separated with colons into several fields. The syntax is to begin each entry with a colon, the entry, and then end the entry with a colon, a back slash, and then a return. 6

395 Using the Installation Shell Script The first line of the field is the name of the printer. You use this name when logging on to a network printer from a workstation. You can define several different names by separating each name with the character. The second, and the following lines, contain the printer's attributes. Attributes of the printer are represented by two character names referred to as capabilities. For more information about capabilities, see the following table. 1 Capability Explanation Value Required for the Network Printer. lp Device name of the printer Nothing. rm Host name of the printer The host name that was registered with the /etc/hosts file. rp Optional specification lp sd Path name of the spool directory. Path name of the spool directory that is to be created. lf Path name of the log file. Path name of log file. For example /var/log/lpd-errs. mx Maximum file size which the directory can copy. When set to 0, the size is unlimited. If nothing is entered, the size is set to 1024 k. Nothing or something suitable. Making the spool directory Create a spool directory under /var/spool/lpd. The name of spool directory should be the name of the printer followed by a d. The spool directory is used to control the data used for a print job. For example, when a print job is created, a temporary copy of the file data used for printing is created in the spool directory. All workstations accessing the network printer need to have a spool directory for the network printer. A spool directory should be made for every network printer entry listed in the /etc/printcap file. The spool directory should normally be made under /var/spool/lpd and the name should match that listed under the sd capability in /etc/printcap. Change the owner and group of the directory to root and lp. The following examples show how to make a /var/spool/lpd/npd spool directory. # cd /var/spool/lpd # mkdir npd # chown root np # chgrp lp np 7

396 UNIX Configuration Making the log file Error messages are logged to a file created in the /var/log directory. The log file name is the printer name followed by d-errs. 1 The log file is used for logging some errors or warning messages by the UNIX workstation. The log file should be made for every network printer entry listed in the /etc/printcap file. The log file should normally be made under /var/log directory and the name should match that listed under the lf capability in /etc/printcap. Change the owner and group of the log file to root and lp. The following examples show how to make a /var/log/npd-errs file. # cd /var/log # touch npd-errs # chown root npd-errs # chgrp lp npd-errs Solaris Adding the IP address and host name to the /etc/hosts file The following line is added to the /etc/hosts file nphost # Network Printer is the IP address, nphost is the host name, from # to the end of the line is a comment. The /etc/hosts file contains a list of the IP addresses and their host names of all of the hosts communicating on the network. Each entry is delimited with a space or a tab, and each line is separated with a return. If you do not use NIS or DNS, you must manually enter the IP address and host name of each workstation using the network printer in the /etc/hosts file. 8 Registering the printer The installation shell script registers the printer as a remote printer. A If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, register the print server and print client to the print service. # lpsystem -t bsd -R 0 -y Network Printer nphost B Register the printer as a remote printer. # lpadmin -p np -s nphost!lp -T dump -I any np is the printer name, nphost is the host name. C If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, set the print job enable to be accepted by print queue. /usr/lib/accept np D If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, set the print job enable to print. /usr/lib/enable np

397 Using the Installation Shell Script HP-UX Adding the IP address and host name to the /etc/hosts file The following line is added to the /etc/hosts file np # Network Printer is the IP address, np is the host name, from # to the end of the line is a comment. 1 The /etc/hosts file contains a list of the IP addresses and their host names of all of the hosts communicating on the network. Each entry is delimited with a space or a tab, and each line is separated with a return. If you do not use NIS or DNS, you must manually enter the IP address and host name of each workstation using the network printer in the /etc/hosts file. Registering the printer The installation shell script registers the printer as a remote printer following the procedure below. A Stop the scheduler. /usr/lib/lpshut B Register the printer. /usr/lib/lpadmin -Pnp -v/dev/null -mrmodel -ormnphost -orplp -ob3 np is the printer name, nphost is the host name. C Set the printer so that the print job is listed in the print queue. /usr/lib/accept np D Set the printer to perform the print job. /usr/lib/enable np E Restart the scheduler. /usr/lib/lpsched 9

398 UNIX Configuration Printing Method 1 Printing with lpr, lp Depending on the type of the workstation being used, execute one of the following commands: BSD UNIX workstation, Linux % lpr -Pprinter_name file_name [file_name...] For example: printer name is np, file names are file1 and file2 % lpr -Pnp file1 file2 Solaris, HP-UX % lp -d printer_name file_name [file_name...] For example: printer name is np, file names are file1 and file2 % lp -d np file1 file2 printer_name is the name that was entered when executing the installation shell script. You can use wild cards ( * or? ) for the file name. The message print session full appears when the maximum number of print requests has been reached (max. 5 sessions). You should try to print again when the number of requests becomes less than five. You can confirm the number of print requests using telnet. For more information about using telnet, see P.13 Printer Status. 10

399 Printing Method Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp You can also print using the rsh, rcp and ftp commands. Print using the format that the printer can support. The message print session full appears when the maximum number of print requests has been reached (max. 5 sessions). You should try to print again when the number of requests becomes less than five. You can confirm the number of print requests using telnet. For more information about using telnet, see Network Interface Board Operating Instructions provided as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. 1 rsh % rsh host_name print < file_name [file_name...] For example: host name is nphost, file names are file1 and file2 % rsh nphost print < file1 file2 host_name is the name entered when executing the installation shell script. If you use a HP-UX, use the remsh command instead of rsh. rcp To specify the file and print it % rcp file_name [file_name...] host_name: For example: host name is nphost, file names are file1 and file2 % rcp file1 file2 nphost: To print all of the files in a directory % rcp -r directory_name host_name: For example: host name is nphost, directory name is directory1 % rcp -r directory1 nphost: host_name is the name entered when executing the installation shell script. You can use wild cards ( * or? ) for the file name. 11

400 UNIX Configuration ftp 1 Depending on the number of files to be printed, use the put or mput commands. Limitation File names cannot contain = or,. To print one file ftp> put file_name To print several files ftp> mput file_name [file_name...] You can use wild cards ( * or? ) for the file name with the mput command. The following procedure shows an example of how to print a file using ftp. A Start ftp using the IP address or host name of the printer. % ftp IP_address host_name is the name entered when executing the installation shell script. B Enter the user name. Ignore the password, and then press the {RETURN} key. Name: Password: C Set the file transfer mode to binary. ftp> bin If the file transfer mode is not set to binary, the image might not be printed correctly. D Print the file. For example, to print one file named file1: ftp> put file1 For example, to print two files named file1 and file2: ftp> mput file1 file2 E Exit ftp. ftp> bye 12

401 Printer Status Printer Status You can use the following commands to have information and the printer status displayed or copied to a file. Use the lpq or lpstat command to display the information about print jobs. Use the rsh, rcp or ftp commands to get more detailed information from the printer. 1 Viewing the Print Job Status with lpq and lpstat BSD UNIX workstation, Linux % lpq -Pprinter_name For example: Printer name is np % lpq -Pnp System V UNIX, Soralis, HP-UX % lpstat -o printer_name For example: Printer name is np % lpstat -o np In case of HP-UX, do not put a space between -o and printer_name. Viewing the Printer Status with rsh and ftp Use the rsh or ftp command to display the status of printer or information about print jobs using specified parameters. You can use these commands for BSD and System V UNIX. If your workstation is HP-UX, use the remsh command instead of the rsh. % rsh host_name parameter % ftp host_name User user_name password: ftp> get parameter - For the user name and password input nothing, and then press the {RETURN} key. 13

402 UNIX Configuration Parameters that can be used with rsh, rcp and ftp: Parameter Information returned Reference 1 status info Status of the printer. Information about print jobs. Information about the paper tray, output tray and printer language of the printer. Network Interface Board Operating Instructions provided as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. Printer Reference provided as a PDF file on the CD- ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. prnlog Record of the last 10 jobs printed. Network Interface Board Operating Instructions syslog Record of messages about the Network Interface Board. provided as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities. Copying Information to a File Use the rcp or ftp command to copy information about the specified parameters to a file. You can use these commands for BSD and System V UNIX. The same parameters are used as those above. % rcp host_name:parameter file_name % ftp host_name User: user_name password: ftp> get parameter file_name For the user name and password input nothing, and then press the {RETURN} key. 14

403 INDEX B BSD UNIX workstation Printing Method, 10 BSD UNIX workstation, Linux Deleting the printer, 5 Printer Status, 13 C D F I N configuration UNIX, 1 Deleting the printer, 5 ftp Printing, 12 installation shell script, 1, 2 Network Interface Board Operating Instructions, i P Printer Reference, i Printer Status, 13 Printing Method, 10 Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp, 11 Q R Quick Installation Guide, i rcp Printing, 11 RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions, i rsh Printing, 11 S Setup Guide, i Solaris, HP-UX Deleting the printer, 5 Printing Method, 10 System V UNIX, Soralis, HP-UX Printer Status, 13 U UNIX, 1 UNIX Supplement, i 15

404 MEMO 16 UE USA G063

405 Copyright 2000

406 UE USA G UNIX Supplement